JP6877038B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a special game according to a determination result of whether or not to execute the special game.

For example, in a pachinko machine, when it is determined to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player, a special game including a plurality of long-open round games in which the large winning opening is opened for a long time is executed, and during the long-open round game, the special game is executed. , The current number of rounds is displayed, and an image prompting the player to hit right is displayed during the round (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-144110

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, it cannot be said that an appropriate display is always performed during the execution of the special game.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an appropriate display during the execution of a special game.

The present invention has adopted the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.
The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided in a gaming area where a gaming ball flows down, and has a variable winning means that can be changed into a non-passing state in which the gaming ball does not pass and a passing easy state in which the gaming ball easily passes, and the variable A special winning area provided in the winning means and capable of winning a game ball, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game for controlling the variable winning means in the easy-to-pass state, and the determination means. When the special game Ru is determined that the execution, game ball running first special game can be finished in the special winning region, it said the game balls during execution of the first special game is finished in the special winning region first 1 A special game execution means for executing a second special game in which the player is more advantageous than the first special game after the completion of the special game, a first game state, and a player more advantageous than the first game state. a second game state and can be controlled gaming state control means composed, including a presentation control means for controlling the effect, and the special game execution means, the special winning game ball during execution of the first special game When the area is not won, the second special game is not executed after the first special game is completed, and the game state control means is a game ball in the special winning area during the execution of the first special game. The game state after the end of the second special game, which is executed after the end of the first special game, can be controlled to the second game state based on the winning of the prize. During the execution of the first special game, it is possible to execute and control an instruction effect for displaying an instruction image instructing the launch of the game ball into the special winning area, and in the first special game, the variable winning means is in the easy-to-pass state. Based on the remaining time from the change to the non-passing state, it is possible to execute and control the time effect according to the remaining time during the execution of the first special game, and the game ball passes through the special winning area. If the game ball has not won the special winning area when the display of the instruction image is finished and the time production is finished, the instruction effect is performed after the time production is finished. Finish .

According to the present invention, it is possible to make an appropriate display during the execution of the special game.

Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 Schematic diagram of the small winning opening 19, the large winning opening 13, and the slide member 17. Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. A block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. Explanatory drawing for explaining jackpot and game state Explanatory drawing for explaining various tables used for special symbol determination A screen view illustrating the screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a normal gaming state. Explanatory drawing illustrating the flow of reach production Screen diagram for explaining the relationship between the decorative design and the small design Screen diagram showing a concrete example of a series of productions that develop into SPSP reach through SP reach (Part 1) Screen diagram showing a concrete example of a series of productions that develop into SPSP reach through SP reach (Part 2) Screen diagram showing a concrete example of a series of productions that develop into SPSP reach through SP reach (Part 3) Explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the icon production performed using the icon Screen diagram showing a concrete example of successful icon change production Screen diagram showing specific examples of rewind suggestion effect and failure rewind effect Screen diagram showing a concrete example of successful production of changing the upper icon Explanatory drawing illustrating the flow of reach rewinding effect Screen view showing a specific example of reach rewinding effect Screen view showing a specific example of the reach reproduction effect performed after the reach rewind effect Explanatory drawing illustrating the end condition for ending the time-saving game state Time chart to explain the screen display during the small hit game Screen diagram showing a specific example of screen display during a small hit game A screen view illustrating the screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the time-saving game state. Explanatory drawing exemplifying the flow of RUSH challenge battle Time chart for explaining the production performed during the RUSH challenge battle and the display mode of the small symbols Screen diagram showing a specific example of RUSH Challenge Battle (Part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of RUSH Challenge Battle (Part 2) Screen diagram showing a specific example of RUSH Challenge Battle (Part 3) Screen diagram showing a specific example of RUSH Challenge Battle (Part 4) Screen diagram showing a specific example of RUSH Challenge Battle (Part 5) Explanatory drawing illustrating the flow of the rewinding effect performed in the first rotation of the time reduction when the number of time reductions is set to 5 times. A block diagram illustrating the configuration of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the game control board 100. Detailed flowchart of switch processing in step S2 of FIG. 33. Detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. 34. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. 34. Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S218 and S229 of FIGS. 35 and 36. Detailed flowchart of gate switch processing in step S24 of FIG. 34 Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 33 Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the stopped processing in step S319 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of normal symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. 33 Detailed flowchart of the slide member control process in step S5 of FIG. 33. Detailed flowchart of the small winning opening opening control process in step S6 of FIG. 33 (No. 1) Detailed flowchart of the small winning opening opening control process in step S6 of FIG. 33 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the large winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the game state setting process in step S745 of FIG. 47. Flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the effect control board 130 Detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. 49 Detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step 103 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S106 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the process during opening of the small winning opening in step S33 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the result effect control process in step S43 of FIG. 49. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the image / acoustic control board 140. Detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step 71 of FIG.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”) according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Rough configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine called a one-kind two-kind mixed type. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 provided with accessories related to winning and determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which the game ball can flow down. Has been done.

The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to a launching device (not shown). The lower plate 29 stores the game balls as prize balls paid out from the game machine 1. When the player operates the take-out button 23, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 opens and the game balls open. It is discharged. In addition, these dishes 28, 29 may be composed of one dish.

In the gaming machine 1, when the player holds the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the gaming ball guided from the upper plate 28 to the launching device has a hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the lever 21 in the gaming area. Fired to the upper position at 10. A game nail, a windmill, or the like (not shown) is provided in the game area 10, and the launched game ball is brought into contact with the game nail, the windmill, or the like to change its moving direction along the game board 2. Fall. When the player operates the stop button 22, the launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped.

When "left-handed" is performed in which the lever 21 is rotated at a small angle of rotation, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force and flows down the left side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by arrow 31. To do. On the other hand, when "right-handed" is performed in which the lever 21 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force, and as illustrated by the arrow 32, the right-hand area in the game area 10 Flow down.

The passage path of the left-handed game ball is provided with a first starting opening 11 and three ordinary winning openings 14 as accessories related to winning and determination. On the other hand, in the passage path of the right-handed game ball, gate 16, small winning opening 19, one ordinary winning opening 14, large winning opening 13, second starting opening 12, and slide are used as accessories related to winning and judgment. A member 17 is provided.

The game ball launched into the game area 10 flows down the game area 10 along the game board 2, and is the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the large winning opening 13, the small winning opening 19, and the normal. There is a case where a ball is entered in any of the winning openings 14 to win a prize. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the winning place are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that did not win the prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

The first starting port 11 is a starting area that is always open, and when a game ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins a prize, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (so-called type 1 big hit), and the determination result is obtained. Is displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (see FIG. 3) of the display 4. Here, when the symbol indicating the jackpot (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, a plurality of round games (7 times in this embodiment: see FIG. 6C) for opening the jackpot 13 are executed.

The second starting port 12 is a starting area that is always open, and in front of the second starting port 12, a guide member that guides the game ball that has moved on the slide member 17 to the second starting port 12. 64 (see FIGS. 2B and 2C) is provided. When the game ball is guided to the guide member 64 by the slide member 17 as an ordinary electric accessory, the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 12 (FIGS. 2 (C-2) to (C-5)). reference). On the other hand, if the game ball is not guided to the guide member 64 by the slide member 17, the game ball does not win the second starting port 12.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins a prize, it is determined whether it is a big hit (so-called per type 1) or a small hit (so-called per type 2), and the determination result is obtained. Is displayed on the second special symbol display 42 (see FIG. 3) of the display 4. Here, when the jackpot symbol notifying that the jackpot is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a plurality of round games using the jackpot 13 are executed for all the round games.
On the other hand, when the small hit symbol notifying that it is a small hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit game using the small winning opening 19 and the second and subsequent round games using the large winning opening 13 are executed. To.

As will be described in detail later, a V winning opening switch 198 (see FIG. 2) is provided inside the small winning opening 19. The V winning opening switch 198 forms a V winning opening that, when a small hit is made, regards the small hit game as the first round and starts the second and subsequent round games.
When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning opening 19 is opened. The second round is provided on the condition that the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 (that is, V winning) during the small hit game. The game is started. In this case, at the end of the jackpot game composed of the second and subsequent round games, the game state shifts from the "normal game state" to the "short-time game state". On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 in the small winning opening 19 during the small hit game, the round games from the second round onward are not executed, and the game state is "short time". Does not shift to "game state".

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball is won in the first starting port 11 is called "first special symbol determination", and the determination is performed on the condition that the game ball is won in the second starting port 12. The determination to be executed is referred to as "second special symbol determination", and these determinations are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination".
Further, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, an advantageous game composed of an open game in which the small winning opening 19 is opened is referred to as a "small hit game", and the round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened is referred to. An advantageous game that is advantageous to the constituent players is called a "big hit game", and the two are distinguished from each other.

<Large winning opening 13>
The big winning opening 13 is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination (the big hit symbol notifying that it is one type is stopped and displayed). Further, in the large winning opening 13, the small hit symbol for notifying that it is a hit of two types is stopped and displayed, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game executed in response to this (V winning). ) Is also released.
A slide member 38 (see FIG. 2B) that can slide in the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 is provided in the opening of the large winning opening 13. The large winning opening 13 is normally closed by the slide member 38. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), or when the game ball wins a V during the small hit game, the slide member 38 A jackpot game is executed in which the jackpot 13 is opened by sliding to the back side of the gaming machine 1. During the big hit game, the big winning opening is until the predetermined condition (in this embodiment, 10 game balls are won in the big winning opening 13 or 29.5 seconds have passed since the big winning opening 13 was opened). A long open round game in which 13 is maintained in the open state and then closed is executed a predetermined number of times at a predetermined time interval.

The big hit game is also executed when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 in the small winning opening 19 during the small hit game. In this case, the small hit is digested by using the small winning opening 19. The game is regarded as the first round, and the second and subsequent round games constituting the jackpot game are digested using the big winning opening 13.
On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game is not started.

During the jackpot game, a long-open round game in which the jackpot 13 is opened for a long time is executed, and for example, 12 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball wins in the jackpot 13, so that the player can play the jackpot game. By hitting right inside, you can get more prize balls than when the jackpot game is not played.

<Regarding the composition of the small winning opening 19>
2 (A-1) to 2 (A-3) are schematic perspective views showing the internal structure of the small winning opening 19. The small winning opening 19 is opened when it is determined as a small hit in the second special symbol determination. As illustrated in FIG. 2, a slide member 191 slidable in the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 is provided in the opening of the small winning opening 19. The small winning opening 19 is normally closed by the slide member 191. On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, the small hit game is executed in which the slide member 191 slides to the back side of the gaming machine 1 to open the small winning opening 19. To. During the small hit game, the slide member 191 is operated in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21) in which the small winning opening 19 is opened 10 times over a period of 15 seconds after the small winning opening 19 is opened. The open game of the small hit game to be operated is executed. Further, when 10 game balls are awarded to the small winning opening 19 during this open game (the 10th game ball is detected by the small winning opening switch 194 (see FIG. 2)), the slide member 191 The operation of is stopped, and the small hit game ends. Also, when the operation of the slide member 191 in the predetermined opening pattern is completed (that is, when 15 seconds have passed since the small winning opening 19 was opened), the small hit game is also completed.

During the opening game, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 21, the slide member 191 operates in an opening pattern in which the small winning opening 19 is opened for 0.044 seconds and then closed by repeating a short opening operation 10 times. To do.

During the small hit game, the small prize opening 19 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern, and for example, 12 prize balls are paid out each time the game ball wins in the small prize opening 19, so that the player is playing the small hit game. By hitting right, you can get more prize balls than when the small hit game is not played.

By the way, the right-handed game ball moves on the small winning opening 19 (above the slide member 191) as illustrated by the arrow 33 (see FIG. 1). Although not shown in the figure, above the small winning opening 19, the left wall that abuts when the game ball moves to the back side of the game machine 1 and the game ball moves to the front side of the game machine 1. The right wall, which comes into contact with the slingshot, is provided at a predetermined interval. The left wall and the right wall are provided with a regulation piece 192 that projects toward the center in the width direction (depth direction of the gaming machine 1) of the slide member 191 that closes the small winning opening 19 (FIG. 2). Therefore, the game ball flows down on the slide member 191 in a meandering manner while abutting on the left and right regulation pieces 192 (see the arrow in FIG. 2A-1). As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time for the game ball to stay on the slide member 191 as compared with the case where the regulation piece 192 is not provided. Therefore, during the open game in which the slide member 191 operates in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21) during the open game, the game ball that reaches the slide member 191 while the small winning opening 19 is closed is transferred to the small winning opening 19. Can be allowed to stay on the slide member 191 until the next release. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing over the slide member 191 without winning the small winning opening 19 during the small hit game, and the opening time of the small winning opening 19 is 0.044. It is possible to easily win a game ball to the small winning opening 19 even if it is very short, such as a second.

As illustrated in FIGS. 2 (A-1) to 2 (A-3), the small winning opening switch 194, the lost winning opening switch 197, the V winning opening switch 198, and the small winning opening switch 198 are inside the small winning opening 19. A slide member 195 is provided.

When the small hit game is not performed, the small winning opening 19 is closed by the slide member 191 and the V winning opening switch 198 is opened, and the lost winning opening switch 197 is closed by the slide member 195 (FIG. 2). (A-1)).

On the other hand, when the open game constituting the small hit game is started, the slide member 191 slides to the back side of the game machine 1 and the small winning opening 19 is opened (FIG. 2 (A-2)). reference). In the state where the small winning opening 19 is opened, as illustrated in FIG. 2 (A-2), the game ball that has entered the inside of the small winning opening 19 passes through the small winning opening switch 194, and then the regulating member. After moving over 195 and the right-sloping portion 196, it passes through the V winning opening switch 198 (see the arrow in FIG. 2 (A-2)). Then, if even one game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198, the second and subsequent round games in which the large winning opening 13 is opened are performed.
In some cases, the game ball that has entered the inside of the small winning opening 19 moves on the left inclined portion 193 and then passes through the small winning opening switch 194.

During the open game of the small hit game, the number of game balls passing through the small winning opening switch 194 is counted, and the slide member 195 is provided on the condition that the ninth game ball passes through the small winning opening switch 194. Slides to the back side of the gaming machine 1 to open the lost winning opening switch 197 (see FIG. 2 (A-3)). Therefore, the tenth game ball that has entered the small winning opening 19 during the small hit game is guided to the losing winning opening switch 197 instead of the V winning opening switch 198.

The slide member 191 has moved to a position where the small winning opening 19 is opened, and then the operation in the predetermined opening pattern is completed, or 10 game balls have passed through the small winning opening switch 194. It returns to the position where the small winning opening 19 is closed.

In this way, since it is easy for the small hit game ball to pass the game ball through the V winning opening switch 198, as long as the player makes a right-handed hit, the big hit game following the small hit game can be easily performed. It can be caused.

In addition, a large letter "V" is written on the member provided at the position corresponding to the area including the small winning opening switch 194, the losing winning opening switch 197, the V winning opening switch 198, and the like, and V. A small letter "V" is written at the position corresponding to the winning opening switch 198 (see FIG. 1).

Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the small winning opening 19 is a V attacker including the V winning opening switch 198 by looking at the large letter "V". Further, the position of the V winning opening switch 198 (the position of the V region) can be easily specified by looking at the small letter "V". The above member is made of a transparent acrylic member or the like, and the player can use the acrylic member to perform a small winning opening switch 194, a slide member 195, a lost winning opening switch 197, a V winning opening switch 198, or the like. It is possible to see it.

<Slide member 17>
FIG. 2B is a schematic front view illustrating the configuration of the slide member 17 and its surroundings, and FIGS. 2 (C-1) to 2 (C-5) are schematic plan views of the slide member 17. In the area on the right side of the game area 10, a slide member 17 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided between the regulation wall 63 and the guide member 64. The slide member 17 is configured to be movable between a storage position (see FIG. 2 (C-1)) and a guide position (see FIG. 2 (C-2)). Here, the guide position is such that the slide member 17 projects from the surface of the game board 2 to the right side region, so that the guide member 64 supports the game ball flowing down the right side region as shown by, for example, arrow 36. It is a position where the game ball can be guided to. One storage position is a position where the slide member 17 does not protrude from the surface of the game board 2, as illustrated in FIG. 2 (C-1).

As illustrated in FIG. 2B, when the large winning opening 13 is closed by the slide member 38, the game ball that has passed over the slide member 38 collides with the regulation wall 61 and is above the inclined member 62. After falling on the inclined member 62 and moving on the inclined member 62, it collides with another regulation wall 63. Here, if the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position, the game ball that collides with the regulation wall 63 falls to the left end portion of the slide member 17. However, the slide member 17 is usually arranged at the storage position (see FIG. 2C-1). Therefore, the game ball that collides with the regulation wall 63 falls along the regulation wall 63, and is finally discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

On the right side of the slide member 17, a guide member 64 for guiding the game ball moving on the slide member 17 to the second starting port 12 is provided (FIGS. 2 (C-1) and 2 (C-2)). reference). The guide member 64 has a bottom portion 641 that supports the game ball, and a wall portion 642 that is curved so that the game ball that has moved from the slide member 17 to the top of the bottom portion 641 can be guided to the back side of the game machine 1. (See FIG. 2 (C-1)).

When the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position (see FIG. 2C-2), the game ball that collides with the regulation wall 63 falls to the left end portion of the slide member 17. The slide member 17 is inclined so that the game ball supported by the slide member 17 can be guided to the guide member 64 (see FIG. 2B). Therefore, if the state in which the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position continues for a predetermined time (about 1.2 seconds in this embodiment), the game ball moved on the slide member 17 reaches the guide member 64. Then, the second starting port 12 is won.

As described above, although the second starting port 12 is a starting area that is always open, the state where the slide member 17 is arranged at the storage position or the state where the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position is a predetermined time. If the above is not continued, the game ball that collides with the regulation wall 63 falls without reaching the guide member 64. Therefore, normally, the game ball does not win the second starting port 12.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, the prize ball is not paid out, but it is determined whether or not to operate the slide member 17. Here, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is to be operated, the operation of returning to the storage position is performed a predetermined number of times when a predetermined time elapses after the slide member 17 moves to the guide position. In this way, in the second starting port 12, the game ball does not win when the slide member 17 is arranged in the storage position, whereas the slide member 17 is arranged in the guide position and the state continues for a predetermined time or longer. By doing so, the game ball can be won.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming is controlled in the "normal gaming state" or the "short-time gaming state" described later. When it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated while the game is controlled in the "time saving game state", the operation of returning to the storage position occurs when 1.92 seconds have passed since the slide member 17 was placed at the guide position. It is done twice.
FIG. 2C-2 is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the game ball has fallen to the left end portion of the slide member 17 immediately after the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position. FIG. 2 (C-3) illustrates the position of the game ball at a timing 0.5 seconds after the slide member 17 is placed at the guide position, and FIG. 2 (C-4) shows the slide member 17 The position of the game ball at the timing when 1.0 second has passed since it was placed at the guide position is illustrated. Further, FIG. 2 (C-5) illustrates the position of the game ball at the timing when 1.2 seconds have elapsed since the slide member 17 was arranged at the guide position. As is clear from the notations shown in FIGS. 2 (C-2) to 2 (C-5), when it is determined that the slide member 17 is to be operated in the time-saving game state, the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position. While the state continues for 1.92 seconds, the game ball that has fallen immediately after the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position reaches the second starting port 12 after about 1.2 seconds.

Therefore, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is to be operated in the time-saving game state, the player can easily win the game ball to the second starting port 12 by making a right-handed strike. Is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated while the game is controlled in the "normal game state", the slide member 17 returns to the storage position 0.036 seconds after being arranged at the guide position. The operation is performed once. As is clear from the notation of FIG. 2 (C-3), in the game ball that has fallen on the slide member 17 immediately after the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position, the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position. At the timing when 0.5 seconds have passed since then, the slide member 17 reaches only near the center. Therefore, when 0.036 seconds have passed since the slide member 17 was placed at the guide position and the slide member 17 returned to the storage position, the slide member immediately after the game ball fell onto the slide member 17. It will fall from 17.

Therefore, if it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated while the game is controlled in the "normal game state", it is impossible to win the game ball in the second starting port 12.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 16 is referred to as "ordinary symbol determination".

The ordinary winning opening 14 is always open like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls is paid out by winning a game ball. In addition, unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins in the normal winning opening 14, no determination is made.

The game balls that have passed over the slide member 191 of the small winning opening 19 are sorted by the game hook and the guide member. That is, the right-handed game ball can win a prize in the ordinary winning opening 14 provided in the game area 10 on the right side in the process of flowing down as illustrated by arrows 32, 33, 34 (see FIG. 1). Further, the right-handed game ball wins the big prize opening 13 if the big prize opening 13 is opened in the process of flowing down as illustrated by arrows 32, 33, 35 (see FIG. 1). If the large winning opening 13 is closed, it flows down as illustrated by arrow 36 (see FIGS. 1 and 2B).

As illustrated by the arrow 36, the flowing game ball can win a prize in the second starting port 12 when the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position for 1.92 seconds in the time-saving game state. On the other hand, at other times, the game is discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18 without winning a prize in the second start port 12.
Further, as illustrated by arrows 32, 33, 34 (see FIG. 1), the game ball that has flowed down may go to the second starting opening 12 without winning the normal winning opening 14.

Since the area on the right side of the game area 10 and the area inside the small winning opening 19 are partitioned by an acrylic member or the like, the game ball that has passed over the slide member 191 enters the small winning opening 19. However, it mainly flows down the right side region as illustrated by the arrows 32 to 35.
Further, since the right side region and the region inside the large winning opening 13 are partitioned by an acrylic member or the like, the game ball that has passed over the slide member 38 (see FIG. 2B) is the large winning opening 13. It will move on the inclined member 62 (see FIG. 2B) without entering the inside.

[Structure example of the production means of the gaming machine 1]
As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 are provided with various effects, such as a main liquid crystal display device 5, a sub liquid crystal display device 6, an effect object 7, a speaker 24, and a frame lamp 25 ( (See FIG. 4), a panel lamp 37 (see FIG. 4), and the like are provided.

The main liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal screen 5”) is provided at a position that is easily visible by the player. .. On the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, a character or item for performing a notice effect, and a hold image (hold icon) displayed in the number in which the first special symbol determination is suspended. ), It is possible to display an effect image including various display objects such as the icon, which suggests that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The sub-liquid crystal display device 6 is an image display device that displays an effect image, is located above the main liquid crystal display device 5 and is arranged in front of the game machine 1 with respect to the main liquid crystal display device 5. As the sub liquid crystal display device 6, a device having a smaller display screen than the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used, and is mainly used for suggestion effect suggesting jackpot reliability. The sub-liquid crystal display device 6 is configured to be able to descend to a position covering the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and, for example, descends to the position during a predetermined suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot reliability is high. ..

In this embodiment, the case where the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are provided will be described, but the number of image display devices may be one or three or more.

The speaker 24 outputs music, voice, sound effects, and the like in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and performs the sound effect.

The effect 7 is arranged in front of and to the side of the liquid crystal screen 5. A light emitting element (for example, an LED) is built in the effecting object 7. The directing accessory 7 performs a predetermined effect by the movement of the accessory itself and / or the light. In the present embodiment, the effect object 7 is configured to imitate a star, is configured to be rotatable with the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 as the axial direction, and is configured to be rotatable from the side of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the liquid crystal screen 5. It is configured to be movable in front of.

Although the board lamp 25 is not shown in the drawing, it is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2, and the frame lamp 37 is built in the frame member 3. The board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light such as changing the lighting or blinking pattern and changing the emission color.

[Structure example of input means of gaming machine 1]
The frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as input means for the player to input (see FIG. 1). The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information by being pressed by the player. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation or move the cursor, and is configured to have an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the gaming machine 1, the effect may be performed according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27.

[Configuration example of display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to the special symbol determination and the normal symbol determination, and as shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, and the first special It includes a symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, and a game status indicator 47.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 changes the symbol and then stops and displays the symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination to determine the first special symbol determination. Notify the result. On the first special symbol display 41, as a symbol for notifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination, a jackpot symbol for notifying one type or a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 makes a determination of the second special symbol determination by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination. Notify the result. On the second special symbol display 42, as a symbol for notifying the determination result of the second special symbol determination, a big hit symbol for notifying one type of hit, a small hit symbol for notifying two types of hits, or a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

By the way, when a game ball is newly won in the first starting port 11 during the variable display of the symbol related to the special symbol determination or during the big hit game (or small hit game), the first special symbol determination and the first special symbol determination triggered by this winning are made. It is not possible to immediately execute the variable display of the symbol. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment reserves the right to determine the first special symbol when the first special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball wins in the first starting port 11. The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination held in this way.

The same applies to the case where a game ball is newly won in the second starting port 12 during the variable display of the symbol related to the special symbol determination or in the big hit game (or small hit game), and the game is played in the first starting port 12. If the second special symbol determination cannot be executed immediately even if the ball wins, the right of the second special symbol determination is reserved, and the second special symbol reservation indicator 44 is held in this way. The number of pending special symbol judgments is displayed.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. In addition, when the normal symbol determination and the symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball passes through the gate 16, for example, during the variable display of the symbol on the normal symbol display 45, the normal symbol is displayed. The right to judge is reserved. On the ordinary symbol hold indicator 46, the number of pending ordinary symbol determinations held in this way is displayed.

The gaming status display 47 displays the gaming status at the time when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. The round display 48 has an opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 during the big hit game when the big hit symbol (or small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42). (Or the opening pattern of the small winning opening 19 during the small hit game) is displayed.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as a "special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 45 is referred to as a "normal symbol". It shall be called. Further, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called a "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called a "second special symbol". It may be distinguished.

[Structure of control device of gaming machine 1]
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1.
On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls sent to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29, a control device for controlling the operation of the game machine 1 is provided. As illustrated in FIG. 4, the control device of the game machine 1 comprehensively directs the production based on the game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game such as various determinations and the transmission of commands, and the commands received from the game control board 100. It is composed of an effect control board 130 that controls the effect, an image / sound control board 140 that controls the effect by images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 that controls the effect by various lamps and movable bodies, and the like.
The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the effect control board 130, the image / sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be composed of one board.

[Structure example of game control board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to the determination and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the program or the like stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the main CPU 101 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

The game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, a slide member control unit 113, a gate switch 114, a large winning opening switch 115, a large winning opening control unit 116, and a normal winning opening switch 117. The small winning opening switch 194, the small winning opening opening / closing part 118, the V winning opening opening switch 198, the losing winning opening opening switch 197, the losing winning opening opening / closing part 119, and the indicators 41 to 48 constituting the display 4 are connected. ..

The first start port switch 111 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 12, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The slide member control unit 113 controls the operation of the slide member 17 by operating an electric solenoid connected to the slide member 17 so as to be drive-transmitted in response to a control signal from the game control board 100.

The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The large winning opening switch 115 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 13, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The grand prize opening control unit 116 operates an electric solenoid connected to a slide member 38 that closes the grand prize opening 13 so as to be drive-transmitted in response to a control signal from the game control board 100, whereby the grand prize opening 13 is operated. Opens and closes. The normal winning opening switch 117 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning opening 14, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

The small winning opening switch 194 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the small winning opening 19, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The small winning opening opening / closing unit 118 opens / closes the small winning opening 19 by operating an electric solenoid connected to the slide member 191 so as to be drive-transmissible in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. The V winning opening switch 198 detects that it has entered the V region and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The loss winning opening switch 197 detects that the game ball has entered the loss area, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The loss winning opening opening / closing unit 119 opens / closes the losing winning opening switch 197 (loss area) by operating an electric solenoid connected to the slide member 195 so as to be drive-transmissible.

When the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 receives a detection signal from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the large winning opening switch 115, the normal winning opening switch 117, or the small winning opening switch 194, , The payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball is won, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control board.

The payout control board is configured to include a drive motor or the like that sends a prize ball from a ball tank provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 to the plate 28.

The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Specifically, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input.

The jackpot random number here is a random number for determining a jackpot or a loss. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that there is a loss. The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the main CPU 101 acquires these random numbers, it first determines whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on whether or not the acquired jackpot random numbers match a predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 102. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (per type). Here, when it is determined to execute the jackpot game (big hit), the jackpot symbol random number is based on which random number value of the predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 102 matches. The type (see FIG. 6C) is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, that is, if there is a loss, whether or not to perform the reach production based on whether or not the acquired reach random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102. Or decide whether to perform a reachless production. In addition, regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is performed, the first when the first special symbol is variablely displayed based on which random number value stored in the main ROM 102 the acquired variable pattern random number matches. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. As a result, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined.

The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Specifically, at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired.

The jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number here are as described above. On the other hand, the small hit symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of small hit when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit.

When the main CPU 101 acquires these random numbers, first, the big hit game (or small hit game) is performed based on whether or not the acquired big hit random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102. Determine whether to execute. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (per one type) or a small hit (per two types). Here, when it is determined to execute the jackpot game (big hit), the jackpot symbol random number is based on which random number value of the predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 102 matches. The type (see FIG. 6C) is determined. Further, when it is determined to execute the small hit game (small hit), the acquired small hit symbol random number is based on which random number value of the predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 102 matches. The type of small hit (see FIG. 6D) is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit game (or small hit game) is not executed, that is, in the case of loss, the acquired reach random number is based on whether or not it matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102. Decide whether to perform a production with reach or a production without reach. Further, regardless of whether or not the big hit game (or small hit game) is performed, the second special symbol is changed based on which random number value stored in the main ROM 102 the acquired variation pattern random number matches. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol at the time of display is determined. As a result, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined.

In this embodiment, a case where two types of random numbers, a big hit symbol random number and a small hit symbol random number, are used to determine the type of big hit and the type of small hit will be described, but in other embodiments, one type is used. Random numbers may be used to determine both the type of jackpot and the type of small hit. Specifically, in the symbol determination table at the time of big hit illustrated in FIG. 6 (C), not only the type of big hit (three types shown in FIG. 6 (C)) but also the small hit is applied to each big hit random number. Types (three types shown in FIG. 6D) are also associated. Then, based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of the jackpot matches the jackpot symbol random number acquired when the game ball wins the second starting port 12, the type of jackpot or Determine the type of small hit.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot game of opening and closing the jackpot 13 via the jackpot control unit 116 based on the determination result of the type of jackpot.
Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit is a small hit, the main CPU 101 executes a small hit game of opening and closing the small winning opening 19 via the small winning opening control unit 118 based on the determination result of the type of the small hit. ..
Further, when the detection signal from the V winning opening switch 198 is input during the small hit game, the main CPU 101 opens and closes the large winning opening 13 via the large winning opening control unit 116 following the small hit game. Play the game.

Then, when the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot game related to the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination), the game after the jackpot game ends based on the type of jackpot determined before the jackpot game starts. Control the state.
On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game related to the second special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 is required to pass the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game before the start of the small hit game. Based on the determined type of small hit, the game state after the big hit game (which is performed following the small hit game) is controlled. That is, when the jackpot game ends, the game state is set to the "time saving game state". If the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed, and the above-mentioned game state performed when the big hit game ends is referred to as "time saving game state". Since the process of setting to "" is not performed, the game is controlled in the "normal game state" at the end of the small hit game.

Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, and executes a normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. Then, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is to be operated, the slide member 17 is operated via the slide member control unit 113.

Further, the main CPU 101 causes each of the indicators 41 to 48 constituting the indicator 4 to execute the above-described processing based on FIG.

[Structure example of effect control board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like. The RTC134 measures the current date and time (date and time).

The sub CPU 131 sets the effect content (effect pattern) based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the big hit game, the small hit game, etc. transmitted from the game control board 100. At that time, the input of the operation information from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 may be accepted, and the effect content corresponding to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 131 transmits a command instructing the execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

[Configuration example of image / acoustic control board 140]
The image / sound control board 140 includes a control CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, and the like. Based on the program stored in the control ROM 142, the control CPU 141 performs arithmetic processing when controlling an image or sound expressing an effect in which the effect content is set on the effect control board 130. The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the control CPU 141 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

The VDP 144 generates an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The acoustic DSP 145 generates acoustic data output from the speaker 24. The control CPU 141 generates a control signal based on the command from the effect control board 130 and the program stored in the control ROM 142, and outputs the control signal to the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145 to output the control signal to the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145. Control the operation.

Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 mainly includes an image ROM that stores material data necessary for generating an effect image, a drawing engine that executes drawing processing of the effect image, and an effect image drawn by the drawing engine. It has an output circuit that outputs to the liquid crystal display device 5 (or the sub liquid crystal display device 6). The drawing engine draws the effect image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the image ROM based on the control signal from the control CPU 141. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in the frame buffer to the main liquid crystal display device 5 (or the sub liquid crystal display device 6) at a predetermined timing.

Although not shown in the figure, the acoustic DSP 145 is used as an acoustic ROM for storing various acoustic data related to production sounds such as music, sound, and sound effects, and as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 145. SDRAM is connected. The acoustic DSP 145 reads acoustic data corresponding to the control signal from the control CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM into the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24.

[Configuration example of lamp control board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. Based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152, the lamp CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operations of the effector 7, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the like. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the lamp CPU 151 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

Light emission pattern data and operation pattern data are stored in the lamp ROM 152. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating each light emission pattern of the light emitting element, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, etc. included in the effecting object 7. The operation pattern data is data indicating an operation pattern of the effecting object 7, the sub liquid crystal display device 6, and the like.

The lamp CPU 151 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 into the lamp RAM 153. , Controls the light emission of the frame lamp 37. Further, the lamp CPU 151 reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and reads the effect pattern 7 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Controls the drive of the motor that operates.

Further, when the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is operated by the player, the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command to notify the effect to that effect to the effect control board 130.

[Explanation of the judgment result of the special symbol judgment and the change in the game state]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the game state. As illustrated in FIG. 5, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming is controlled in the "normal gaming state" or the "short-time gaming state".

The "normal game state" is a low base state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 12. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the "normal game state", the ratio determined in the normal symbol determination when the slide member 17 is operated is set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 256/256), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set. Is set to a relatively long time (for example, 8 seconds), and the operation time of the slide member 17 when it is determined to operate the slide member 17 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.036 seconds). To.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" is a high base state in which the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 12. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the "time saving game state", the ratio determined in the normal symbol determination when the slide member 17 is operated is set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 256/256), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set. Is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the operation time of the slide member 17 is relatively long (for example, 3.84 seconds = 1) when it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated. It is set to .92 seconds x 2).

<Selection of fluctuation pattern>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of time reductions in which the second special symbol determination and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed in the "time saving game state" after the jackpot game is completed is set to one. There are cases where it is set to 5 times and cases where it is set to 100 times, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol selected in the "time saving game state" has the following characteristics.

(When the number of time reductions is set to 1)
When the number of time reductions is set to 1, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction, the variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long (130 seconds in the present embodiment) is always present. Be selected. Then, when the hold related to the maximum of four second special symbol determinations accumulated when the second special symbol is variablely displayed in this fluctuation pattern is exhausted, the second special symbol is set as the fluctuation pattern. 2 A fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively short is always selected.
In this way, when the hold related to the second special symbol determination is digested, the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively short is selected, but in the present embodiment, it is digested. When the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "missing", the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected, and when it is "small hit", the second special symbol A fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of is slightly longer, 16 seconds, is selected.

(When the number of time reductions is set to 5)
When the number of time reductions is set to 5, from the first rotation of the time reduction to the fourth rotation of the time reduction, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time of the second special symbol is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "missing" and it is determined to perform the effect without reach for the first rotation of the time reduction to the fourth rotation of the time reduction, the variation of the second special symbol A variation pattern with a time of 30 seconds is selected. In the present embodiment, when this 30-second variation pattern is selected, the pseudo shortening variation in which the decorative pattern is changed for 2 seconds and then pseudo-stopped for 0.5 seconds is repeated 10 times, and the pattern is lost without the reach effect. Notification production is performed.

The first rotation of the time saving is as follows.
That is, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is "big hit" or "small hit", the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60 seconds or 35 seconds is Be selected.
When the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is selected, the reach is established in any of the pseudo shortening fluctuations of the repeated pseudo shortening fluctuations, and the hit notification effect is performed in the reach effect after the reach is established.
On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of 35 seconds is selected, the immediate hit effect that pretends that a small hit (or a big hit) has occurred is performed without performing the pseudo shortening fluctuation. This immediate hit effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 31.
Further, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is "missing" and it is determined that the effect with reach is to be performed, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60 seconds. A variation pattern is selected. When this 60-second fluctuation pattern is selected, a reach is established in any of the pseudo shortening fluctuations of the repeated pseudo shortening fluctuations, and a loss notification effect is performed in the reach effect after the reach is established.

In the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is "small hit" or "big hit", the appearance rate of the immediate hit effect is too high, so that the immediate hit effect is produced. In order to suppress the decrease in interest, the selection ratio at which the 35-second fluctuation pattern is selected is set to a value lower than the selection ratio at which the 60-second fluctuation pattern is selected.

Further, here, for convenience of explanation, the case where the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is selected when the reach effect is performed has been described as an example, but for example, when the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is selected, the tenth time is described. Pseudo shortening fluctuation establishes reach and develops into reach production, and when a 57-second fluctuation pattern is selected, reach is established by the 9th pseudo shortening fluctuation and develops into reach production, and a 54-second fluctuation pattern develops. In fact, a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are prepared, such that when is selected, the reach is established by the eighth pseudo shortening fluctuation and the reach effect is developed.

The second rotation of the time reduction to the fourth rotation of the time reduction are the same as those of the first rotation of the time reduction, except that the fluctuation pattern of 35 seconds in which the immediate hit effect is performed is not selected.

For the 5th rotation of the time reduction, the fluctuation pattern of 130 seconds is always selected and the 2nd special symbol of the 1st rotation of the time reduction is displayed in a variable manner, as in the case of the 1st rotation of the time reduction when the number of times of the time reduction is set to 1. The same production as the RUSH Challenge Battle, which is held over a period of time, will be performed. This RUSH challenge battle will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 24.

(When the number of time reductions is set to 100)
On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is set to 100, an extremely short variation pattern with a variation time of 1.5 seconds for the second special symbol is selected regardless of the determination result of the second special symbol determination.

Due to the board structure of the game board 2, it is possible to win a prize in the first starting port 11 of the left-handed game ball, but it is not possible to win a prize in the first starting port 11 of the right-handed game ball. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the player strikes the game ball to the first starting port 11 with the aim of winning a prize. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first starting port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed. Here, if it is determined to be a jackpot (per type), the type of jackpot is determined. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination are prepared: "7R time reduction 1 time jackpot", "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", and "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot". (See FIG. 6 (C)).

When it becomes "7R time reduction 1 big hit", a big hit game including 7 long open round games in which the big winning opening 13 is opened long is executed, and after this big hit game is completed, one second special symbol judgment is made. The game is controlled in the time-saving game state until the variation display of the second special symbol according to the above is completed.
Until the 7R jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the normal game state. Therefore, the right to judge the second special symbol is not reserved even though the player is hitting right during the jackpot game, and the right to judge the first special symbol is reserved at the end of the jackpot game. Then, the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol will be performed. In this case, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified using the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 without displaying the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 (see FIG. 23). To.

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, so that the player can easily win the game ball in the second starting port 12 by making a right-handed hit. .. Then, when the game ball wins the second starting port 12 and both the right related to the first special symbol determination and the right related to the second special symbol determination are reserved, the first special symbol is held. The right related to the second special symbol judgment is given priority over the right related to the judgment.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 12 after the big hit game is completed, the second special symbol determination for determining whether or not it is a small hit (or big hit) is performed, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is performed. The fluctuation pattern selection process for selecting is performed, but here, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time of the second special symbol (for example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 130 seconds) is always selected. Therefore, during the period (for example, 130 seconds) in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed after the 7R jackpot game is completed, the time-saving game state continues, and the player can use the gate 16 and the second start port 12. It is possible to accumulate four rights to judge the second special symbol by hitting right with the aim of. Therefore, in the case of "7R time reduction 1 time big hit", the second special symbol determination is executed 5 times (= 1 time + 4 times) after the 7R big hit game is completed.

When it becomes "7R time reduction 5 times big hit", a big hit game including 7 long open round games that open the big winning opening 13 for a long time is executed, and after this big hit game is completed, the second special symbol judgment of 5 times The game is controlled in the time-saving game state until the variation display of the second special symbol according to the above is completed.
After the 7R jackpot game is completed, the second special symbol determination for determining whether or not it is a small hit (or jackpot) is performed five times, but when the fifth special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol determination is performed. Similar to the case of one time reduction described above, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time of the second special symbol may be selected. Therefore, the time-saving game state will continue until the end of the period (for example, 130 seconds) in which the fifth special symbol is variablely displayed after the 7R jackpot game is completed, and the player can play the gate 16 and the gate 16. By hitting right at the second starting port 12, it is possible to accumulate four rights for determining the second special symbol.
Therefore, in the case of "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", the second special symbol determination is executed 9 times (= 5 times + 4 times) after the 7R jackpot game is completed.

On the other hand, when it becomes "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot", a jackpot game including 7 long opening round games in which the big winning opening 13 is opened for a long time is executed, and after this jackpot game is completed, 100 times of the second special The time-saving game state continues until the symbol is determined. In this way, when the number of time reductions is set to 100, an extremely short fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds for the second special symbol is selected. Since the small hit probability related to the second special symbol determination is 1 / 7.5 (= 40/300: see FIG. 6 (B)), when the number of time reductions is set to 100, the big hit There is a feature that small hits are likely to occur in a short time after the game is completed.

In this way, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination becomes a big hit, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment always shifts to the time saving game state, and 5 times (=) according to the number of time saving times (type of big hit). The second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is performed 9 times (= 5 times of time reduction + 4 hold), or 100 times (time reduction 1 time + 4 hold).
Here, even if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", the game will be controlled again in the time-saving game state after the big hit game corresponding to the big hit this time is completed (Fig.). 5).

By the way, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the types of small hits are "4R time reduction 5 times small hit" and "12R time reduction 5 times small" exemplified in FIG. 6 (D). It is determined to be either "hit" or "16R time saving 100 times small hit". That is, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the number of time reductions is set to 5 times or 100 times.
On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", if the type of big hit is determined to be "7R time reduction 1 time big hit" (see FIG. 6C), the time reduction will be reduced. Since it is given only once, the player is disadvantaged compared to the case where the small hit is assigned even though the big hit related to the second special symbol judgment, which has a lower probability than the small hit of 1/300, is assigned. There may be a problem of becoming.

Therefore, in another embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the jackpot of one time reduction can be selected, while the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit". In the case of "big hit", a configuration in which one big hit in a short time is not selected may be adopted. Specifically, the symbol determination table illustrated in FIG. 6C is used as the symbol determination table dedicated to the first special symbol determination, and the second special is referred to by referring to a symbol determination table different from this symbol determination table. One example is to adopt a configuration in which the type of jackpot related to the symbol determination is determined to be one of "4R time reduction 5 times jackpot", "12R time reduction 5 times jackpot", and "16R time reduction 100 times jackpot". ..

On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (per two types), a small hit game including an open game for opening the small winning opening 19 is performed. This open game is as described above based on FIG. 2, but if the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game of this small hit game, a V prize is obtained, and the big hit game is followed by the small hit game. Is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled again in the time-saving game state (see FIG. 5).

If the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "big hit", a big hit game using the big winning opening 13 is executed for all round games from the first round to the final round, and this big hit game ends. After that, the game is controlled again in the time-saving game state (see FIG. 5).
On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the small hit game is executed using the small winning opening 19. Here, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 and wins a V during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed in which the second and subsequent round games are digested using the large winning opening 13. .. Then, after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state (see FIG. 5). However, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game (V winning is not performed), the second and subsequent round games are not performed, and after the small hit game is completed, The game is controlled in the normal game state (see FIG. 5).

Even if the second special symbol determination is performed for the set number of time reductions, even if the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit or a big hit, the gaming state shifts from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Will be done. Further, even when the total number of times of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination executed in the time-saving game state reaches the specified number of times, the game state shifts from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. .. The end conditions related to these time-saving gaming states will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

[Explanation of judgment method using random numbers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a determination using a random number executed by the main CPU 101 (see FIG. 14) of the game control board 100 will be described. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 102 and used for determining the special symbol. Note that, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 6 will be described by taking as an example a case where the range in which each random number can be taken is considerably smaller than the actual value, and each random number stored in the main ROM 102 is stored as a continuous value. ..

FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol determination. The jackpot random number shown in FIG. 6A is a random number used for the first special symbol determination executed when the game ball wins the first starting port 11. In the present embodiment, the range in which the jackpot random number can be taken is "0" to "299", whereas one random number value "0" is stored as the winning value of the jackpot, and 299 non-winning values are stored. Random numbers "1" to "299" are stored. Therefore, the probability that the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed in the normal gaming state will be a big hit is 1/300.

FIG. 6B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table used for the second special symbol determination. The jackpot random number shown in FIG. 6B is a random number used for the second special symbol determination executed when the game ball wins the second starting port 12. In the present embodiment, the range in which the jackpot random number can be taken is "0" to "299", whereas one random number value "0" is stored as the jackpot winning value, and the small hit winning value is 40. The random number values "1" to "40" are stored, and 259 random number values "41" to "299" are stored as non-winning values. Therefore, the probability that the judgment result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time-saving game state will be a big hit is 1/300, while the probability that it will be a small hit is 1 / 7.5 (= 40 /). 300).

That is, in the case of the above "7R time reduction 1 big hit", 1 / 7.5 small hit is assigned by any of the 2nd special symbol judgments of 5 times (= 1 time + 4 times of hold). Therefore, the continuation rate of the time-saving game state is about 51.1%.
In addition, in the case of the above "7R time reduction 5 times big hit", 1 / 7.5 small hit is assigned by any of the 2nd special symbol judgments of 9 times (= 5 times + 4 times of hold). Therefore, the continuation rate of the time-saving game state is further increased to about 72.4%.
In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned "7R time saving 100 times big hit", 1 / 7.5 small hits may be assigned by any of the 100 times second special symbol judgment, so that the continuation rate of the time saving game state Will be even higher.

It is possible to provide a probability setting switch that can be set in any of settings 1 to 6 on the game control board 100, and to make the jackpot probability (probability of one type jackpot exemplified in FIG. 5) different depending on the setting. The configuration may be adopted. In this case, for example, if the setting 1 is set, the jackpot probability becomes 1/300, if the setting 2 is set, the jackpot probability becomes 1/290, if the setting 3 is set, the jackpot probability becomes 1/280, and if the setting 4 is set, the jackpot probability becomes 1/280. An example is a configuration in which the probability is 1/270, the jackpot probability is 1/260 when set to setting 5, and the jackpot probability is 1/250 when set to setting 6.

However, although the probability per type is changed depending on the setting, it is preferable not to change the probability per type 2 (that is, a small hit). In this way, by not changing the probability per type, it is possible to suppress the change in the continuation rate of the time-saving gaming state when the setting related to the probability per type is changed. It is possible to prevent a large change in performance.

FIG. 6C is an explanatory diagram for explaining a symbol determination table referred to for determining the type of the jackpot when the determination result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot.

When the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a big hit, or when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined based on the big hit symbol random number acquired together with the big hit random number. Will be done. There are three types of jackpots: "7R time reduction 1 time jackpot", "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", and "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot".

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot, the range in which the jackpot symbol random numbers can be taken is 100, which are "0" to "99". Eighty-five random numbers from "0" to "84" are associated with "7R time reduction 1 big hit", and 14 random numbers "85" to "98" are associated with "7R time reduction 5 times big hit". Numerical values are associated with each other, and one random number value of "99" is associated with "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot".
Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment (or the second special symbol judgment) is a big hit, it is determined as "7R time reduction 1 big hit" at a ratio of 85/100 (= 85%). The ratio of 14/100 (= 14%) is determined to be "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", and the ratio of 1/100 (= 1%) is determined to be "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot".

FIG. 6D is an explanatory diagram for explaining a symbol determination table referred to for determining the type of the small hit when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit.

When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the type of small hit is determined based on the small hit symbol random number acquired together with the big hit random number or the like. There are three types of small hits: "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", "12R time reduction 5 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 100 times small hit".

When it becomes "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", a small hit game including an open game that opens the small winning opening 19 is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during this opening game, it becomes a small hit game. Subsequently, a jackpot game including three long-open round games (two rounds to the final round) in which the large winning opening 13 is long-opened (= 4 times-one open game) is executed. Then, after the jackpot game is executed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state until the variation display of the second special symbol related to the second special symbol determination five times is completed.

In the case of "12R time reduction 5 times small hit", the number of long open round games of the big hit game executed following the small hit game is 11 times instead of 3 times (= 12 times-1 open game). Except for the fact that it is, it is the same as the case of "4R time saving 5 times small hit".

In addition, in the case of these "4R time reduction 5 times small hit" or "12R time reduction 5 times small hit", the 2nd special symbol is used as the variation pattern of the 2nd special symbol related to the 5th second special symbol determination. Since a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 130 seconds) is selected, up to four rights for determining the second special symbol can be obtained while the fifth special symbol variation is displayed. It is possible to store.

On the other hand, when it becomes "16R time reduction 100 times small hit", a small hit game including an open game for opening the small winning opening 19 is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during this opening game, the small winning is executed. Following the game, a jackpot game including a long-open round game (2 rounds to the final round round game) of 15 times (= 16 times-one open game) in which the large winning opening 13 is long-opened is executed. Then, after the jackpot game is executed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state until the second special symbol determination is executed 100 times.

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 6D, in the symbol determination table at the time of small hit, the range in which small hit symbol random numbers can be taken is 100, which are "0" to "99". Then, 35 random numbers of "0" to "34" are associated with "4R time saving 5 times small hit", and "35" to "89" for "12R time saving 5 times small hit". 55 random number values are associated with each other, and 10 random number values of "90" to "99" are associated with "16R time saving 100 times small hit".
Therefore, when the second judgment result is a small hit, it is determined as "4R time reduction 5 times small hit" at a ratio of 35/100 (= 35%), and 55/100 (= 55%). The ratio is determined to be "12R time reduction 5 times big hit", and the ratio is determined to be "16R time reduction 100 times small hit" at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%).

It should be noted that, when the slide member 17 is operated in the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, the loss probability, the probability of selecting various jackpots, the probability of selecting various small hits, and the normal symbol determination shown in the explanations so far. It goes without saying that the probability of determination, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the operation time of the slide member 17, and the like are merely examples, and may be other numerical values.

[Example of screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the normal gaming state]
FIG. 7 is a screen view illustrating the screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the normal gaming state. When the game is controlled in the above-mentioned normal game state, as illustrated in FIG. 7, the liquid crystal screen 5 has a decorative symbol display area 50, a hold icon display area 51, the area 52, and a small symbol display area. 53 is formed.

In addition, during the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 or the like and the small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are not completely stationary but sway on the spot. It may continue to move slightly. On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are also in a completely stationary state. For this reason, in the following explanation, the state in which the decorative symbol or small symbol is completely stationary is called "main stop", and the state in which the decorative symbol or small symbol is not completely stationary and continues to move finely on the spot is "pseudo". We call it "stop" and make a clear distinction between the two.

<About the decorative pattern display area 50 and the decorative pattern>
The decorative symbol display area 50 is a display area in which a decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination is displayed. When the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol display area 50 is, for example, a part of a decorative symbol symbol sequence consisting of a sequence of numbers 1 to 9 continuously written in the vertical direction from bottom to top. Are actually stopped so that three are lined up in the horizontal direction (see, for example, FIG. 9A). In this situation, for example, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed, and the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the decorative symbol are started accordingly (for example). (See FIG. 9B). Then, at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination, and the first special symbol that notifies the determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified. Is stopped and displayed, and the above three decorative symbols are stopped.

The decorative design has the following features.
That is, the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in a manner of notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination before the predetermined time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and as the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol determination is performed. There is a feature that the main stop is performed in a mode of notifying the determination result.

Further, the decorative symbol has a feature that it may be hidden during the variable display of the special symbol, for example, during the SPSP reach or the story reach, which will be described later.

Further, the decorative symbol is basically stopped in a pseudo-stop in a manner showing the determination result of the special symbol determination, whereas the main stop may be performed without a pseudo-stop as an exception. Specifically, when the number of time reductions after the jackpot game is set to 100, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Then, while the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed for 1.5 seconds, the scroll display of each symbol row is continued without pseudo-stopping the decorative symbol.

In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation when the number of time reductions is set to 1, the decorative symbol is hidden after the reach is established (FIGS. 27 (B) to (G), FIG. 28). (See (A)), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation is "small hit", it is displayed again in a mode indicating a small hit (see FIG. 28 (C)). On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation is "missing", the decorative symbol remains hidden even after the variation display of the second special symbol is completed after the reach is established. Then, along with the stop display of the second special symbol, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is notified by the three small symbols (see FIGS. 28 (A), (E), and (F)). It should be noted that this also applies to the variation display of the second special symbol at the fifth rotation when the number of time reductions is set to one.

In addition, when the hold of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is exhausted, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "missing", The decorative symbols are not displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol and between the stop of the second special symbol and the elapse of the fixed time (FIGS. 28 (G) to (H), FIGS. 29 (A) to (A) to (. See F)). On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the three decorative symbols in the mode of notifying that the second special symbol is a small hit before the variable display of the second special symbol ends. As the variable display is started and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the above three decorative symbols are finally stopped (see FIGS. 25 (B), 30 (G) and (H)). It should be noted that a symbol promotion effect using the decorative symbols may be performed between the start of the variable display of the three decorative symbols and the time when the three decorative symbols are finally stopped.
The same applies to the case where the hold of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the variation display of the second special symbol at the fifth rotation of the time reduction is exhausted when the number of time reductions is set to five. Is.

In the following description, the effect performed by using the decorative symbol display area 50 including the variable display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as "variable effect". In addition, the decorative symbol displayed in the left column of the three symbol rows is called the "left symbol", the decorative symbol displayed in the middle column is called the "middle symbol", and the decorative symbol displayed in the right column is called the "right". Sometimes called "design".

<About the small symbol display area 53 and the small symbol>
The small symbol display area 53 is a display area in which three small symbols indicating whether or not the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner are displayed, and the decorative symbol is displayed. It is a display area smaller than the symbol display area 50. In the small symbol display area 53, as the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the three small symbols of the left small symbol, the small and medium-sized symbol, and the right small symbol is started (for example, the symbol). 10 (A) and (B)). Then, as the special symbol and the decorative symbol are finally stopped, the three small symbols are finally stopped in a manner showing the determination result of the special symbol determination (see, for example, FIG. 12F).

This small symbol is different from the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 in the following points. That is, the decorative symbol is a sequence of numbers in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top, and a part of the symbols constituting the sequence is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. As shown above, three columns are displayed in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, in the small symbol, three small symbols, a left small symbol, a small and medium-sized symbol, and a right small symbol, are arranged side by side in a horizontal row, and each small symbol is arranged in the vertical direction of the liquid crystal screen 5. When viewed from above as the axial direction, for example, by rotating counterclockwise, each small figure is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 1, 2, ... The number indicated by changes. That is, each small figure is different from the decorative pattern in that the display position is almost unchanged.

Further, regarding the decorative symbol, for example, the display area may be changed from the decorative symbol display area 50 due to the development of the reach effect (see, for example, FIGS. 10 (E) and 10 (F)), but each small symbol is used. The display area is not changed from the small symbol display area 53.

Further, although not shown in the figure, each decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 is configured as a highly decorative symbol in which a character peculiar to the number is added to the number. On the other hand, the small design is different from the decorative design in that it is a non-decorative design composed of only numbers.

In addition, the decorative symbol may be hidden during a predetermined period other than when the variable display of the special symbol starts and ends (see, for example, FIG. 11 (D)). Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 28 (E) to (H), FIGS. 29 (A) to (F), and FIGS. 30 (C) to (F), the variable display of the special symbol is started and then ended. May not be displayed at all.
On the other hand, the small symbol is different from the decorative symbol in that it is not hidden during the variable display of the special symbol and the stop display of the special symbol.

Further, in the full rotation effect performed using the decorative pattern, three decorative symbols may be synchronized, and in the full rotation effect, the decorative symbols in each row such as "111", "222", and "333" are aligned. Each symbol column is scrolled and displayed in this state.
On the other hand, the left small symbol, the small and medium-sized symbol, and the right small symbol are characterized in that they are not synchronized except during the full rotation effect. Specifically, when each of these three small symbols is rotating at high speed, each small symbol does not show the same number at the same time.

Further, in the normal game state, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" and the reach effect is not performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, the decorative symbol is determined as the first special symbol. After a pseudo stop in a manner showing the determination result of the above, the main stop is performed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed from the start to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and are finally stopped with the stop display of the first special symbol. This also applies to the case where the reach effect is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, but the reach effect has a low jackpot reliability, for example, a normal reach or an SP reach is performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit", at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in the manner of indicating the jackpot. The three small symbols are also pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot (see, for example, FIG. 9F).

In addition, during the variable display of the first special symbol, if it develops into a reach effect with high jackpot reliability such as SPSP reach or story reach, the decorative symbol is hidden and the left small symbol out of the three small symbols is displayed. And the right small symbol makes a pseudo stop in the reach mode, and only the small and medium-sized symbols continue to rotate at high speed.

When the number of time reductions is set to 100, an extremely short fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds for the second special symbol is selected. Therefore, when the second special symbol is fluctuated and then stopped and displayed in this 1.5-second fluctuation pattern, the small symbol is pseudo-stopped during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, as in the case of the decorative symbol. Instead, the small symbol is finally stopped along with the stop display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the number of time reductions is set to 1 or 5, the hold related to the second special symbol determination accumulated during the final fluctuation in the time reduction game state is consumed after shifting to the normal game state. Selects a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 second as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the second special symbol is fluctuated and then stopped and displayed in this 1-second fluctuation pattern, the small symbol does not pseudo-stop during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed. Along with the stop display, the small symbol is finally stopped (see, for example, FIG. 25 (C)). Then, when the pending determination result of the second special symbol determination is "missing", the decorative symbol is not displayed between the time when the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the time when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. (See FIGS. 28 (G) to (H) and FIGS. 29 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination that has been held is "small hit", the second special symbol is displayed between the time when the second special symbol is changed and displayed and the time when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. After the decorative symbols (and small symbols) indicating the determination result of the determination are pseudo-stopped, these decorative symbols (and small symbols) are finally stopped along with the stop display of the second special symbol (FIG. 25 (B)). (See FIGS. 30 (G) to (H)).

The decorative design and the small design have the following in common.
That is, when the numbers indicated by the small symbols and the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols are the same, the colors of these small symbols and the decorative symbols are also the same. For example, if one symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 is light blue, the next two symbols displayed are blue, and the next three symbols are purple, each small symbol is displayed. The symbol is displayed in light blue when the small symbol indicates 1, blue when the small symbol indicates 2, and purple when the small symbol indicates 3. Therefore, the color of each small symbol (left small symbol, small and medium-sized symbol, and right small symbol) changes each time the number indicated by rotation is switched.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 7, when the player strikes left and the game ball wins the first starting port 11 while the game is controlled in the normal game state, the acquired information acquired according to the winning. The first special symbol determination is executed based on (big hit random number, etc.), and after the first special symbol is variablely displayed, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the following effects are performed.

That is, first, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is started. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started so that the three symbol rows composed of the plurality of decorative symbols scroll from top to bottom. The three small symbols start rotating at high speed (see, for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B). In the following description, the effect performed by using the decorative symbol display area 50 including the variable display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as "variable effect".

Then, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of scrolling, for example, the left symbol, which is the decorative symbol in the left column, is pseudo-stopped before all the decorative symbols are finally stopped, and the right symbol, which is the decorative symbol in the right column, is stopped. Also pseudo-stops. In this way, when the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, if these decorative symbols are not the same symbol, the reach is not established and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing". Three decorative symbols (for example, "254") that notify the existence are in a pseudo-stopped state on the effective line, and are pseudo-stopped along with the stop display of the first special symbol indicating "loss". The three decorative designs will stop. In this case, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and show the same appearance as the three decorative symbols with the stop display of the first special symbol indicating "loss". In the mode, the main stop is performed at the same time as the three decorative symbols.

When the non-reach effect is performed in this way, the three small symbols basically continue to rotate at high speed without a pseudo stop during the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, FIG. 9B). (See (C)), and with the stop display of the first special symbol, the main stop is performed so as to show the same outcome as the three decorative symbols (see, for example, FIG. 12 (H)).
However, during SPSP reach and story reach, which will be described later, there is a period during which the decorative symbols are not displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and therefore, during this period, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped in the reach mode (for example, FIG. 11 (D). )reference).

In the decorative symbol display area 50, when the same decorative symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped, the reach is established (see, for example, FIG. 10C). When the reach is established in this way, the reach effect gives the player the expectation that the same decorative symbols as the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) will stop in the middle row as the middle symbols and become the same symbols. Is done. When the reach is established, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed (see, for example, FIG. 9C), and when they develop into normal reach or SP reach, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed. , During SPSP reach or when it develops into story reach, three small symbols will pseudo-stop in the reach mode.

Here, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed when the variation display of the first special symbol is started is "missing", the reach effect is produced on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the variation display of the first special symbol. Is performed, and three decorative symbols indicating reach loss eyes (for example, "343") are pseudo-stopped in order to notify the loss, and these three decorative symbols (and three small symbols) are accompanied by the stop display of the first special symbol. ) Stops. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not performed, the three decorative symbols showing the above-mentioned disparity are pseudo-stopped, and the main stop is accompanied by the stop display of the first special symbol. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, the "loss notification effect" is executed in which the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating loss and then the main stop is performed to notify the loss.

When this loss notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the first special symbol determination and the variation display of the first special symbol are immediately started. The right.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the reach effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and the mode indicating the jackpot (for example, "333" or "777") is doublet. The three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped at (doublet), and the main stop is accompanied by the stop display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped in the same manner indicating a jackpot so as to be synchronized with the three decorative symbols (see FIG. 9 (F)), and with the stop display of the first special symbol, 3 The book stops with one decorative pattern. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, a "hit notification effect" is executed in which the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating the jackpot and then the main stop is performed to notify the jackpot. When this hit notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is executed.

<Hold icon display area 51>
The hold icon display area 51 is an area in which a hold icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is displayed. In the game machine 1, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 11 in a situation where the special symbol determination and the special symbol variation display cannot be started immediately, such as during the special symbol variation display or the jackpot game, the first special The right to judge the symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment).

In this way, when the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the same number of hold icons as the number of hold icons for the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol hold indicator 43 are displayed in the first hold area 51. Will be done. FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 51 in order to suggest that the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is the maximum “4”. In FIG. 7, in order to express the order in which the hold icons are displayed in an easy-to-understand manner, numbers are attached to each hold icon, but in reality, hold icons that do not include the numbers are displayed.

When the game is controlled in the normal game state, the game ball is basically not won in the second starting port 12, and therefore the right to determine the second special symbol is not reserved. The hold icon related to the second special symbol determination is not displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the display area for displaying the hold icon is not formed. Further, when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, the right of the second special symbol determination is reserved, but the hold icon corresponding to the hold is not displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to distinguish between the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination and the hold icon related to the second special symbol determination. Therefore, in the following description, the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination (hold icon display area 51). The hold icon) displayed in is simply called the "hold icon".

(About the change in the display mode of the hold icon)
By the way, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is usually displayed as a white hold icon. On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51, an effect of changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the hold icon may be performed. When this effect is performed, the white hold icon changes to a hold icon in a color that suggests jackpot reliability, such as blue, green, red, or gold. The colors illustrated here are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability. Gold and red are easy to be selected in the case of a big hit, but difficult to be selected in the case of loss, and are easy to be selected when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time. Green is easy to select when it is a "big hit" or when it is a "miss" but the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a medium time. Blue is easily selected when it is "missing" or when it is "missing" and the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time.

In the present embodiment, the gold icon (see FIG. 16E) will be described by taking the case where the display color and shape are different from the icon of another display color as an example. Further, here, the case where the display color of the hold icon changes once has been described. For example, the white hold icon changes to the blue hold icon, and this blue hold icon later changes to the red hold icon. In some cases, the display color of one hold icon is changed a plurality of times, such as changing. In addition, here, the case where the display color of the hold icon, which was white when the display of the hold icon is started, changes to another display color has been described, but the display color of the newly displayed hold icon is changed from the beginning. It may be another display color different from white, and an effect of changing the display color of the hold icon of the other display color may be performed.

Up to this point, the effect of changing the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 has been described, but the same effect may be performed for the icon displayed in the area 52, which will be described later. ..

In the present embodiment, the effect of changing the display mode of the icon (holding icon or the icon) is the effect of changing the display color of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 14C to 14H), the display color of the icon, and the effect. A case where the effect of changing the shape (see, for example, FIGS. 15 (H) and 16 (A) to (E)) will be described.
However, the effect of changing the display mode of the icon may be any one that changes at least one of the display color, shape, and size of the hold icon (or the icon), for example, the hold icon or the icon. It may be an effect of changing only the size of the icon, or an effect of changing the shape and size of the hold icon or the icon (without changing the display color).

<About the area 52>
The icon display area 52 (hereinafter abbreviated as “the area 52”) is an area for displaying the icon as a variation suggestion image suggesting that the first special symbol is variablely displayed. The icon is displayed in the area 52 with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and is erased from the area 52 at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, for example. The timing of erasing the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased during the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, it is conceivable to delete the icon when SPSP reach develops or when story reach develops.

The first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 (hold icon including the number "1" closest to the area 52: see FIG. 7) is executed. Then, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the hold icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as the icon. At that time, when other hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 51, those hold icons are shifted in the direction of approaching the area 52 in the hold icon display area 51.

[Flow of production accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the reach effect. When the first special symbol determination is executed by the main CPU 101, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 (see FIG. 7) is started along with the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 8 (A)). The start of the variable display of the decorative pattern is as described above based on FIG. 7.

When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, three decorative symbols (for example, loose stitches) showing a loss are simulated in the decorative symbol display area 50 without reaching during the variable display of the first special symbol. After the stop, the winning notification effect of stopping the three decorative symbols may be performed along with the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the loss (see FIG. 8 (B)).

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a big hit and when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is lost but it is decided to perform the reach effect (based on the reach random number), the first 1 During the variable display of the special symbol, the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the effective line, and reach is established (see FIG. 8C). Then, when the reach is established in this way, a predetermined decorative symbol that is the same as the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) stops on the effective line as the middle symbol and raises the player's expectation that the symbols are aligned. Reach production is performed.

In the present embodiment, the reach effects that can be executed along with the variable display of the first special symbol include a normal reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "normal reach"), an SP reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "SP reach"), and an SPSP reach. There are four types of reach effects: production (hereinafter abbreviated as "SPSP reach") and story reach production (hereinafter abbreviated as "story reach").

The normal reach (see FIG. 8D) is a reach effect in which the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). When the reach is established to the normal reach, the scroll speed of the middle row symbol row, which is scrolled at high speed between the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol), gradually decreases. Here, at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time is 15 seconds) is used. When selected, the following variation effects are performed.

When the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line as the middle symbol, and then the same three decorative symbols on the effective line (for example, "777") are stopped. The hit notification effect (see FIG. 8B) is performed to stop the doublet). On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", a decorative symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line as the middle symbol, and then three decorative symbols on the effective line (for example, "787") are stopped. A hit notification effect (see FIG. 8B) is performed to actually stop the reach loss.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively long is selected, the scroll display of the symbol row in the middle row is displayed even after the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol passes on the effective line in the normal reach. It continues to develop into SP reach (see FIG. 8 (E)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 8 (F)). In this embodiment, these reach effects notify whether or not the character is a big hit depending on the outcome of the battle between the main character (hereinafter abbreviated as "hero character") and the enemy character (hereinafter abbreviated as "enemy character"). It is configured as a reach production to do.

SP reach and SPSP reach are positioned so that SP reach is the first half of the battle and SPSP reach is the second half of the battle, and the enemy characters that fight are common between the first half of the battle and the second half of the battle. That is, for example, when a battle with the enemy character A is developed in the SP reach in the first half of the battle, a battle with the same enemy character A is developed in the SPSP reach in the latter half of the battle.

When comparing SP reach and SPSP reach, SPSP reach has higher jackpot reliability than SP reach, and compared to the case where a win is notified at the end of SP reach, a win is lost at the end of SPSP reach. Is more likely to be notified of the jackpot (it is easier to win the battle with the enemy character).

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 8, when SPSP reach is performed, it develops from normal reach to SPSP reach via SP reach, and directly develops from normal reach to SPSP reach without passing through SP reach. There are cases where it is done.

On the other hand, story reach (see FIG. 8 (G)) is an effect of notifying whether or not a specific story is a big hit depending on whether or not a specific story is developed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the ending of the story is a predetermined ending. It is configured. In the present embodiment, when four types of reach effects are compared, the jackpot reliability of the story reach is the highest, and there are cases where the normal reach directly develops into the story reach and cases where the SP reach develops into the story reach.

In this embodiment, a case where there is only one type of normal reach will be described. However, as a normal reach, a short reach with a short effect execution time and a long reach with a longer effect execution time than the short reach can be executed, and the long reach is performed. It is possible to develop from reach to SP reach, SPSP reach, or story reach, but from short reach, a configuration that does not develop into these three types of reach production may be adopted.

Further, the type of reach effect and the method of developing the reach effect illustrated in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the type of reach effect and the method of development may be other.

[Relationship between decorative patterns and small patterns]
Next, the relationship between the decorative symbol and the small symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 9. Here, FIG. 9 is a screen view for explaining the relationship between the decorative symbol and the small symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 9A, when the three decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 50 are actually stopped because the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol display area 53 The three small symbols displayed in are stopped so as to show the same numbers as the above three decorative symbols. That is, for example, when 2 symbols as the left symbol, 8 symbols as the middle symbol, and 5 symbols as the right symbol are actually stopped, the left small symbol indicating 2 and the small and medium-sized symbol indicating 8 and the right small symbol indicating 5 are shown. Is actually stopped (see FIG. 9 (A)).

FIG. 9B exemplifies a state immediately after the scroll display of the three symbol rows in the decorative symbol display area 50 is started. As described above, immediately after the scroll display of the three symbol strings is started, the scroll speed is high, and it is difficult to identify the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50. In this way, under the situation where the three symbol rows are scrolling at high speed, the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 rotate at a high speed at a speed at which the numbers indicated by the small symbols are difficult to identify. Therefore, the player can recognize that the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner based on the fact that the three small symbols are rotating at high speed.

In FIG. 9C, during the above-mentioned normal reach, the symbol rows in the middle row continue high-speed scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 50 with the two symbols on the left and the two symbols on the right pseudo-stopped as reach symbols. The situation is illustrated. At this time, each of the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 continues to rotate at high speed.
Further, in FIG. 9 (D), during the SP reach described above, the two left symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are reduced and moved to the upper left, and the two right symbols are reduced to the upper right. It is illustrated that these reach symbols are pseudo-stopped in the display area after the movement. At this time, the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 still continue to rotate at high speed.

In this way, when the reach symbol is displayed, the player can easily grasp which decorative symbol the reach is established based on the reach symbol, and which symbol is the reach. It is not necessary to notify whether it is established or not by using a small symbol. Therefore, during normal reach and SP reach, the three decorative symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 continue to rotate at high speed as before the reach was established (see FIG. 9B) (FIG. 9). (C) and (D)).

On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 9 (E), during SPSP reach and story reach, a reach effect is produced by using a wider display area of the liquid crystal screen 5 including an area in which the reach pattern is displayed during SP reach. Since it is expanded, the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed becomes very long. On the other hand, if the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are rotated at high speed, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not the reach is established. Therefore, during the period when the decorative symbols are not displayed during SPSP reach or story reach, the left side shows the same numbers as the reach symbols (for example, 2 symbols) that were displayed before the development of these reach effects. While the small and right small symbols stop in a pseudo manner, the small and medium-sized symbols continue to rotate at high speed (see FIG. 9E).

In this way, since the left small symbol and the right small symbol show the same numbers as the reach symbol, the player can see the two small symbols even though the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) is not displayed. Based on, it is possible to easily identify which reach symbol was used to establish the reach. In addition, since the small and medium-sized symbols continue to rotate at high speed, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by seeing the small and medium-sized symbols continue to rotate at high speed. it can.

In FIG. 9 (F), the judgment result of the first special symbol determination becomes a big hit, and in the final stage of the reach production of any of the above four types of reach production, the jackpot is shown (here, “222”). It is illustrated that three decorative symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop manner in doublet). In this way, when the three decorative symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop manner in a manner indicating a jackpot, the three small symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop display so as to show the same number as these decorative symbols (FIG. 9 (F)). reference).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the case of "7R time reduction 1 time jackpot", even-numbered doublets are stopped as decorative symbols, and in the case of "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", the decorative symbols other than 7 symbols are used. The combination of the type of jackpot and the decorative symbol that notifies the jackpot is such that the odd number of doublets is stopped and the doublet of 7 symbols is stopped as a decorative symbol in the case of "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot". It is associated. Then, at the end of the reach production, after displaying the doublet numbers that do not correspond to the actual jackpot type in a pseudo stop, these doublets are changed to the doublet corresponding to the actual jackpot type. In some cases, a symbol promotion effect related to a decorative symbol, which is stopped and then stopped, may be performed (see FIG. 9 (G)).

Specifically, for example, the first movement display of moving to the back side of the liquid crystal screen 5 while getting doublet of "222" exemplified in FIG. 9 (F) is performed (FIG. 9 (G)). (See), after this first movement display, the doublet (for example, "777") having a number different from the doublet that has moved to the back side is moved so as to pop out from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5. The movement display of 2 is performed (see FIG. 9 (H)).

Here, when the first movement display is performed, there is a possibility that the doublet that has become smaller by moving to the back side of the liquid crystal screen 5 may change, so that the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 may change. All rotate at high speed (see FIG. 9 (G)). That is, when the symbol promotion effect is performed, the three small symbols that have been pseudo-stopped in the manner of showing doublet start high-speed rotation again (see FIGS. 9 (F) and 9 (G)).

On the other hand, when, for example, the doublet of "222" is changed to the doublet of "777" by the second movement display, the doublet after the change does not change further, and the doublet is stopped as it is. Become. For this reason, when the second movement display in which the changed doublet pops out is performed at the end of the symbol promotion effect, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped so as to show the same number as the changed doublet. (See FIG. 9 (H)). Then, as the three decorative symbols (here, doublet) are pseudo-stopped after the second movement display is performed and then the main stop is performed, the three small symbols (here, the same number) in the small symbol display area 53 are stopped. Make a pseudo stop and then make a final stop so that getting doublet) is also synchronized.

In addition, FIGS. 9 (G) and 9 (H) exemplify a pattern promotion effect in which even-numbered doublets are changed to doublets of "777" in order to notify "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot". However, when notifying "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", even-numbered doublets change to odd-numbered doublets (for example, "333" or "555") other than 7, and in the small symbol display area 53. The three small symbols also change to the same odd doublet so as to synchronize with this change.

On the other hand, when notifying "7R time reduction 1 big hit", the first movement display and the second movement display in which even-numbered doublets do not change to odd-numbered doublets are performed. In this case, the three small symbols (see FIG. 9 (F)) that had been pseudo-stopped in an manner showing an even number of doublets (for example, “222”) were once rotated at high speed (see FIG. 9 (G)). ), The pseudo-stop is performed again in a manner showing the same even-numbered doublets (for example, "222") as before the start of high-speed rotation.

In addition, there are cases where a symbol promotion effect is performed in which the decorative symbols are changed from doublets of odd-numbered symbols other than 7 symbols to doublets of 7 symbols, but the doublets before the change are not even-numbered symbols and odd-numbered symbols other than 7 symbols. Except for the fact that it is a symbol, the symbol promotion effect is the same as described above based on FIGS. 7 (F) to 7 (H), and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific examples of a series of productions that develop into SPSP reach>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12, a specific example of a series of effects that develop into SPSP reach will be described. Here, FIGS. 10 to 12 are screen views showing specific examples of a series of effects that develop into SPSP reach via SP reach.

In FIG. 10A, decorative symbols and small symbols showing the same disparity are stopped in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon in the area 52 is “missing”. The state is illustrated. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", it indicates a disparity (here, "154") before the predetermined fluctuation time elapses after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Two decorative symbols stop quasi-stop. At that time, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the three decorative symbols indicating the disparity are stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. At the same time, the three small symbols rotating at high speed actually stop (without pseudo-stop) in a manner showing the same disparity (see FIG. 10 (A)). Note that FIG. 10A illustrates a state after the icon is deleted from the area 52 with the end of the variable display of the first special symbol.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after these decorative symbols and small symbols are finally stopped, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest reserved icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, a hold icon whose display mode (for example, display color) has changed is displayed in the hold icon display area 51 as the earliest hold icon until the confirmation time elapses (for example, the display color). (See FIG. 10A), the earliest hold icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as a new icon, and the decorative symbol display area 50 has a variable display of the decorative symbol and a small symbol display area 53. High-speed rotation of the small symbol in (see FIGS. 10A and 10B) is started. As shown in FIG. 10B, with the shift of the earliest hold icon, the remaining hold icons (here, one white hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 51 are concerned. It shifts toward the region 52.

Here, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, if the variation effect pattern of the effect with reach is set by the sub CPU 131, for example, after the left symbol is pseudo-stopped, the same right as the left symbol. The symbol is pseudo-stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 10C). FIG. 10C illustrates a state in which reach is established with 6 symbols. In this way, when the same decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped as a reach symbol in the left column and the right column, for example, the reach line connecting these two reach symbols is superimposed and displayed on the reach symbol, and a voice such as "reach!" Is output. It is output from the speaker 24.

When the reach is established in this way, a normal reach is performed to raise the player's expectation that the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol will stop on the effective line connecting the two reach symbols (see FIG. 10 (D)). .. During this normal reach, the three small symbols are still spinning at high speed. When this normal reach is developed, the scroll speed of the symbol rows in the middle row, which has been scrolled at high speed, gradually decreases (see FIGS. 10 (D) and 10 (E)).

Here, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, if the variation effect pattern that develops from the normal reach to the SP reach is set, the following effect display is performed. That is, when the symbol row in the middle row is scrolled, the same middle symbol (6 symbols in this case) as the reach symbol passes the effective line (see FIG. 10 (E)) and does not appear in the diagram. The scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row increases, and high-speed scrolling is restarted, making it difficult to identify the middle symbol displayed in the middle row. At that time, the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are reduced to the upper left region and the upper right region of the liquid crystal screen 5 while maintaining the reach state, respectively. Move (see FIGS. 10 (E) and 10 (F)).

Next, a development suggestion effect that suggests that the main character and the enemy character will develop into the first half battle is performed (see FIG. 10 (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10 (G), there is an effect display in which the main character who battles with the enemy character appears from the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 and moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. Will be done.

Then, an enemy character appears from the right end of the LCD screen 5, and an enemy character appearance effect that also moves to the center of the LCD screen 5 is performed, and SP reach as the first half battle will be started. (See FIG. 10 (H)).

When the enemy character appearance production is performed, a production display is performed to show how the main character encounters the enemy character and is surprised (see Fig. 11 (A)), and then the main character and the enemy character fight against each other. An offensive and defensive effect is performed (see FIG. 11 (B)). Here, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, if the variation effect pattern that develops from the normal reach to the SP reach and notifies the winning is set in the SP reach, the first half. A production display showing how the victory or defeat is decided in the battle will be performed, and it will be notified at the end of the SP reach whether it is a big hit or not. Specifically, although not shown in the figure, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment this time is a big hit, after the effect display showing how the hero character defeats the enemy character is performed, After the decorative symbols and small symbols of doublet have been pseudo-stopped, a hit notification effect is performed. In addition, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment this time is a loss, the decorative symbol and the small symbol of the reach loss eye are pseudo-stopped after the effect display showing how the main character is defeated by the enemy character is performed. After that, the loss notification effect that the main stop is performed is performed.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the variation effect pattern is set, which is developed from the normal reach to the SPSP reach via the SP reach, and the SPSP reach notifies the winner. , The following production display is performed. Specifically, at the end of the SP reach (first half battle), the director 7 is displayed on the LCD screen 5 as a development effect that suggests that the battle between the main character and the enemy character cannot be settled and develops into the second half battle. It moves to a predetermined production position in front, and at the production position, the production accessory 7 rotates while emitting light in a predetermined light emission pattern (see FIG. 11 (C)). Along with this, the liquid crystal screen 5 is provided with an effect display showing how light is emitted radially from the effect object 7.

Subsequently, the production character 7 returns to the initial position, and after the production display is performed to display a solid white background image on the LCD screen 5, the main character and the enemy character confront each other again and develop into the second half battle. An introduction effect of SPSP reach is performed, which suggests that the SPSP reach is to be performed (see FIG. 11 (D)). In this introductory production, the character "VS Enemy Character A", which indicates that a battle with Enemy Character A among multiple Enemy Characters will start, and the degree of expectation of the main character's victory over Enemy Character A by the number of stars The indication of the expected degree of victory is displayed (see FIG. 11 (D)).

In the SPSP reach (the same applies to the story reach), the reach effect is developed using a wider display area than the normal reach and the SP reach. Therefore, the hold icon display area 51 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the hold icon displayed on the hold icon display area 51 are erased, and are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the liquid crystal screen 5. The reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are also erased from the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIGS. 11B and 11D). With the development to SPSP reach and story reach, in addition to the hold icon display area 51 and the hold icon, the icon displayed in the area 52 and the area 52 may be deleted from the liquid crystal screen 5. Good.

Along with this, the player cannot grasp which decorative symbol the reach is established based on the reach symbol, so that the left small symbol and the right small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are changed. Pseudo-stop is performed in a manner showing the same number as the reach symbol (see FIG. 11 (D)).

In this way, when the SPSP reach as the second half battle is started, for example, an offensive and defensive production showing how the main character who has been attacked by the enemy character is attacked by dropping the weapon (long sword) possessed is performed. (See FIG. 11 (E)). Then, by showing how the beam rays emitted from the weapon (ray gun) that the main character has changed toward the enemy character, a fanning effect that raises the player's expectation for winning the second half battle is performed. (See FIG. 11 (F)).

Then, at the end of the SPSP reach, an operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 11 (G)). In this operation promotion effect, the valid period during which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid is set in advance. For example, a button image imitating the effect button 26 and "press !!" to prompt the player to operate the effect button 26. A letter and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 before the remaining time of the valid period becomes zero, or when the effect button 26 is not operated during the valid period and the valid period ends. If the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "missing", a production display showing how the main character's attack is counterattacked by the enemy character without hitting and the main character is defeated is performed, and the reach loss (for example, "676") is displayed. A loss notification effect is performed in which the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating ") are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "big hit", as a hit suggestion effect suggesting a big hit, an effect display showing how the main character's attack hits the enemy character and the enemy character is defeated is performed. (See FIG. 11 (H)). At that time, the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 in the reach mode are pseudo-stopped in the manner of showing doublet (see FIGS. 11 (G) and 11 (H)). When this hit suggestion effect is performed, a hit notification effect is performed in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the three decorative symbols showing doublets are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed (). See FIG. 12).

When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", it is based on FIGS. 9 (F) to 9 (H) between the time when the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating doublet stop in a pseudo-stop and the time when the symbol stops. The above-mentioned symbol promotion effect is performed. FIG. 12A exemplifies a state in which the decorative symbol and the small symbol showing the doublet of "666" are pseudo-stopped at the end of the SPSP reach.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of the pseudo stop of these symbols, the symbol promotion effect is started. When the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination this time is "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot", the first movement display that moves to the back side of the liquid crystal screen 5 while getting doublet of "666" becomes smaller. This is done (see FIG. 12B), and after this first movement display, the doublet of "777", which is different from the doublet that has moved to the back side, pops out from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the front. The second movement display is performed (see FIG. 12 (C)), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the doublet of "777" are pseudo-stopped, and the first special symbol is "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot". As the jackpot symbol indicating that the number is stopped is displayed, these decorative symbols and small symbols are stopped (see FIG. 12 (D)).

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination this time is "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", the player has moved to the back side following the first movement display illustrated in FIG. 12 (B). A second movement display is performed in which the odd-numbered doublets (here, "333") other than the seven doublets, which are different from the even-numbered doublets, are moved so as to pop out from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the front (FIG. 12). (See (E)), the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the doublet of "333" are pseudo-stopped, and the jackpot symbol notifying that the first special symbol is "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot" is stopped and displayed. As a result, these decorative symbols and small symbols are stopped (see FIG. 12 (F)).

Further, when the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination this time is "7R time reduction 1 jackpot", the player has moved to the back side following the first movement display illustrated in FIG. 12 (B). A second movement display is performed in which the same even-numbered doublets (here, "666") are moved so as to pop out from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the front (see FIG. 12 (G)). As the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the doublet of "666" are pseudo-stopped, and the jackpot symbol notifying that the first special symbol is "7R time reduction 1 jackpot" is stopped and displayed, these The decorative design and the small design are stopped (see FIG. 12 (H)).

[About icon change production]
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an effect using the hold icon (or the icon), a "hold icon change effect" for changing the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 and a hold icon are used. It is possible to execute the "icon change effect" that changes the display color of the icon displayed with the start of the change of the first special symbol.

In the gaming machine 1, after performing a hold icon change effect for changing the display color of the hold icon, the icon that changes the display color of the icon displayed when the first special symbol related to the hold icon starts to change. The icon change effect may be performed in the first effect pattern in which the change effect is not performed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1, the display color of the icon displayed when the first special symbol related to the hold icon starts to change is changed without performing the hold icon change effect of changing the display color of the hold icon. The icon change effect may be performed in the second effect pattern for performing the icon change effect.
Further, in the gaming machine 1, after performing a hold icon change effect for changing the display color of the hold icon, the display color of the icon displayed with the start of change of the first special symbol related to the hold icon is changed. The icon change effect may be performed in the third effect pattern for performing the icon change effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to realize these icon change effects, the pre-determination processing shown below is performed at the timing when the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and the first special symbol determination is suspended. Is done.

<About pre-judgment processing>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 during the variable display of the special symbol in the normal gaming state, a predetermined number of rights for determining the first special symbol according to the winning. Up to (4 in this embodiment) can be reserved. In this way, when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 and the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the right to hold is a big hit, and this reservation is exhausted. A pre-determination process is executed at the timing when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11, which variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. This pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the pre-determination process related to the reserved first special symbol determination is executed in this way, a hold command including the pre-determination information indicating the result of the pre-determination process is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 executes the following processing at the timing when the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination is received. That is, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect based on the prior determination information included in the received hold command. Then, when it is decided to execute the hold icon change effect, the effect pattern of the hold icon change effect is determined. Specifically, when executing the hold icon change effect, it is determined which display color the hold icon is to be displayed in the hold icon display area 51 (initial display color), and this hold icon is the hold icon display area 51. Decide which display color to change to in the end while it is displayed in. Then, it is also determined what kind of effect pattern is used to change the display color of the hold icon from the initial display color to the final display color. Then, these determination results are set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the hold icon change effect, and the icon display command including this setting information is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140 to realize the hold icon change effect.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the icon change effect in the third effect pattern, the sub CPU 131 is displayed when the first special symbol related to the hold icon for which the hold icon change effect is performed based on the setting information starts to change. When performing the icon change effect for changing the display color of the icon, the following processing is also executed at the timing when the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 131 determines the display color of the icon displayed in the area 52 based on the setting information related to the hold icon change effect. For example, when the hold icon finally changes to a green hold icon while being displayed in the hold icon display area 51, the display color (initial display color) of the icon displayed in the area 52 is changed to green. To decide. In addition, the final display color of the icon is determined based on the pre-judgment information included in the received hold command, and the icon is displayed in any effect pattern from the initial display color to the final display color. It is also decided whether to change the display color of.
Then, the sub CPU 131 sets these determination results in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the icon change effect, and transmits the variation effect start command including the setting information to the image / sound control board 140 to produce the icon change effect. To realize.

Further, when the sub CPU 131 executes the icon change effect in the second effect pattern, the sub CPU 131 executes the process related to the icon change effect without executing the process related to the hold icon change effect. Specifically, when the hold icon change effect using the hold icon is not executed, the white hold icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as the icon. Therefore, the sub CPU 131 determines the initial display color of the icon to be white. Then, the final display color of the icon is determined based on the pre-judgment information received in advance, and the display color of the icon is changed from the initial display color to the final display color by what kind of effect pattern. Also decide.

The result (pre-judgment information) of the pre-judgment process performed at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 and the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved is the reserved first special symbol determination. It is consistent with the result of the jackpot determination process (see step S309 and FIG. 40 in FIG. 39) and the variation pattern selection process (see step S310 and FIG. 41 in FIG. 39) performed when the right is exhausted.
Therefore, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect pattern of the icon change effect based on the result of the jackpot determination process and the result of the variation pattern selection process for the icon change effect. You may try to do it.

[Flow of the icon production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the flow of the icon effect performed using the icon will be described. Here, FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the icon effect performed using the icon.

When it is determined by the sub CPU 131 to perform the above-mentioned icon change effect, that is, when it is determined to change the display color of the icon, the icon exemplified in FIG. 13 is defined as the icon change effect. Either the change success effect (see FIG. 13 (A)), the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)), or the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) is performed. In the present embodiment, these icon change success effects that change the display color of the icon throw the item of the predetermined color possessed by the ally character (character imitating a snowman) who is the ally of the main character and the icon. Will be described when the icon is configured as an effect of the effect content (effect pattern) in which the display color of the icon is changed to the same color as the hit item (see, for example, FIGS. 14 (C) to 14 (H)). ..

In addition to the above-mentioned ally character throwing an item to change the display color of the icon, the display color of the icon is changed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of developing SP reach). Is prepared, or the display color of the icon changes in response to the display of characters (or symbols) suggesting that the icon changes. On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 corresponds to the icon used for the icon change success effect, for example, in the case of performing the icon change success effect of FIG. 13 (A), which effect content is used to perform the icon change success effect. 1 When the variable display of the special symbol is started, it is determined by, for example, a lottery using a random number.
Further, there are a plurality of execution timings of the icon change effect, and when the icon change effect is executed, the icon change effect is performed at at least one of the plurality of execution timings.

Note that FIG. 13 illustrates a case where the icon change success effect of FIG. 13A is performed once during one variation display of the first special symbol, but the icon change success effect is performed a plurality of times. It may be said. For example, when the initial display color of the icon is set to white and the final display color of the icon is set to red, the display color of the icon is changed from white to green. An effect is performed, and a second successful icon change effect of changing the display color of the icon from green to red may be performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines in advance at the time of winning the first start opening that the icon change effect is not executed, when the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon is started, the first Whether or not to perform an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) indicating a state in which changing the display color of the icon fails between the start and the end of the variable display of the special symbol. For example, it is determined by a lottery using random numbers, and the icon change failure effect is executed based on the determination result.

In addition, an icon change success effect in which an item of a predetermined color possessed by an ally character is thrown to hit the icon and the display color of the icon is changed to the same color as the hit item (see FIG. 13 (A)). For the icon change failure effect, although the item of the predetermined color possessed by the ally character is thrown, the icon cannot be hit, and as a result, the display color of the icon does not change. (See FIG. 15 (A)).

In this way, when the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (A)) is not performed, the icon failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) of the effect content corresponding to the icon change success effect is set at a fixed ratio (see FIG. 13 (B)). For example, by performing at 10%), it is possible to make the player expect that the icon change success effect will be performed even if the period during which the icon change success effect is not performed continues for a long time.

As for the display color of the icon, for example, it is conceivable to adopt a plurality of configurations as follows. That is, the first configuration is a part of the case where a preliminary determination result indicating that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, in which the effect with reach is performed due to the fluctuation, is selected at the start of the fluctuation is obtained. , The icon change success effect of finally changing the display color of the icon to blue or higher (blue, green, red, or gold) is executed.
In the second configuration, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol whose reach effect eventually develops to SP reach or higher (SP reach, SPSP reach, or story reach) due to the fluctuation is selected at the start of the fluctuation. In a part of the case where the pre-determination result indicating that is obtained, the icon change success effect of finally changing the display color of the icon to green or more (green, red, or gold) is executed.
The third configuration indicates that the variation pattern of the first special symbol whose reach effect will eventually develop to SPSP reach or higher (SPSP reach or story reach) due to the variation is selected at the start of the variation. In a part of the case where the determination result is obtained, the icon change success effect of finally changing the display color of the icon to red or more (red or gold) is executed.
The fourth configuration is a part of the case where a preliminary determination result indicating that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, in which the non-reach effect is to be performed due to the fluctuation, is selected at the start of the fluctuation is obtained. The configuration is such that the icon change failure effect that does not change the icon display color from white is executed.

By the way, when the above-mentioned first to fourth configurations are adopted, the following problems may occur. That is, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the effect with reach is performed is selected in about 10% of the cases where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is lost. It has been done, and about 90% of the losses are produced without reach. Therefore, regarding the fourth configuration, if the icon change failure effect is performed at a rate of, for example, 15% when the reachless effect is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (A)) is difficult to perform. Then, the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) frequently appears, and as a result, not only the player feels uncomfortable, but also the item hits the icon even if a ally character appears. On the other hand, the player does not have a sense of expectation, and there is a possibility that the effect of the successful icon change effect is significantly reduced.

Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, the sub CPU 131 determines the effect pattern of the icon effect by performing the following processing. That is, the sub CPU 131 uses, for example, a random number when the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon is started when it is determined in advance at the time of winning the first start opening to perform the icon change effect. One of the effect pattern A, the effect pattern B, and the effect pattern C is selected by the lottery, and the icon change effect is performed with the selected effect pattern.

Here, the effect pattern A is the icon change effect in which the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (A)) is performed between the start and the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. It is a production pattern of.
The effect pattern B includes an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) and a rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13)) between the start and end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. C)) and the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) are performed, and then the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)), which is the success pattern of the icon change failure effect of FIG. 13 (B). ) Is the effect pattern of the icon change effect.
The effect pattern C includes an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) and a rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13 (FIG. 13)) between the start and end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. C)) and the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) are performed, and then the higher-level icon change success effect (FIG. 13 (F)), which is the success pattern of the icon change failure effect of FIG. 13 (B). (See) is the effect pattern of the icon change effect.

Here, when the icon change success effect of FIG. 13 (E) and the upper icon change success effect of FIG. 13 (F) are compared, there are the following differences between the two. Specifically, for example, an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) in which a blue item possessed by an ally character is thrown but cannot be hit by the icon is followed by an icon change success effect (FIG. 13). When performing (see (E)), as this icon change success effect, use the same blue item that was used for the icon change failure effect, and hit the blue item to hit the icon to display the icon. An icon change success effect that changes the display color to blue is performed. This also applies when the item used for the icon change failure effect is an item of another color (for example, green or red).

On the other hand, when the higher-level icon change effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) is performed after the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)), it is as follows. Specifically, for example, after the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) in which the blue item possessed by the ally character is thrown but the icon cannot be hit, the upper icon change success effect (FIG. When performing 13 (F)), as this icon change success effect, an item with a higher color (here, for example, green, red, or gold) than the one used for the icon change failure effect is used. An icon change success effect is performed in which an item of the higher color is hit on the icon and the display color of the icon is changed to the same higher color as the item. This also applies when the item used for the icon change failure effect is an item of another color (for example, green or red).

In this way, the color of the item used for the upper icon change effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) is higher than the color of the item used for the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)). Therefore, for example, when the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) using the golden item which is the highest color is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)) is performed. While it may be performed, there is a feature that the high-ranking icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) is not performed.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the icon change success effect in FIG. 13 (E) becomes the same color as the icon color that could not be changed in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)). While it is an effect that succeeds in changing the icon, the upper icon change success effect in FIG. 13 (F) cannot be changed in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)). The two differ in that it is an effect that succeeds in changing the icon to a color higher than the color of the icon.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) as a so-called ghost effect is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)) and the higher rank are performed. An icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) may be performed. For this reason, it is effective that the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) causes a problem that the player's expectation that the display color of the icon changes is significantly lowered. It is possible to suppress it.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)) using the same color item as that used in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)), the icon change failure effect. It is possible to execute a higher-level icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) using an item with a higher color than that used in the effect (see FIG. 13 (B)). For this reason, the player can be made to feel unexpected, and the synergistic effect of the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) and the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) creates a high effect. Can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)) and the higher-level icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) appear in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)). It is configured as an effect that succeeds in changing the display color of the icon as a result of redoing the action performed by the ally character (in the present embodiment, the action of throwing an item aiming at the icon). Therefore, in order to effectively suggest that the above action is to be redone, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon change success effect of FIG. 13 (E) or the upper icon change success effect of FIG. 13 (F) is performed. Prior to this, a rewinding effect (see FIG. 13C) and a failed rewinding effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed.

Further, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, after the rewinding effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failed rewinding effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed, the icon changes. A case where the success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)) or the success effect of changing the upper icon (see FIG. 13 (F)) is always executed will be described.
On the other hand, in another embodiment, after the rewinding effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failed rewinding effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed, the icon change failure in FIG. 13B is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which an icon change failure effect that is the same as or similar to the effect is performed.
However, in this case, when the icon change failure effect is performed even though the rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (C)) and the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) are performed, the player When the rewinding effect (see FIG. 13 (C)) and the failed rewinding effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) are performed in order to reduce the discomfort felt, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)). (See) or the higher-level icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) is likely to be performed, and it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the icon change failure effect is difficult to be performed.

<Specific example of successful icon change production>
Next, a specific example of the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14 is a screen view showing a specific example of the icon change success effect.

In FIG. 14A, decorative symbols and small symbols showing the same disparity are stopped in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon in the area 52 is “missing”. The state is illustrated. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", it indicates a disparity (here, "154") before the predetermined fluctuation time elapses after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Two decorative symbols stop quasi-stop. At that time, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the three decorative symbols indicating the disparity are stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. At the same time, the three small symbols rotating at high speed are finally stopped (without a pseudo stop) in a manner showing the same disparity (see FIG. 14 (A)). Note that FIG. 14A illustrates a state after the icon is deleted from the area 52 with the end of the variation display of the first special symbol.

When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 1 second) elapses after these decorative symbols and small symbols are stopped, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest reserved icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51 as the earliest hold icon until the confirmation time elapses (see FIG. 14A). The earliest hold icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as a new icon, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 and the high-speed rotation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 53 are displayed. It is started (see FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (B)). As shown in FIG. 14 (B), the remaining hold icons (here, one white hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 51 are concerned with the shift of the earliest hold icon. It shifts toward the region 52.

Here, when the sub CPU 131 is set to execute the icon change success effect of changing the display color of the icon from white to green when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, it is as follows. Production is performed. That is, in a situation where the variable display of the decorative symbol and the high-speed rotation of the small symbol are performed, the ally character appearance effect in which the ally character possessing the green item appears at the right end of the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed (FIG. 14 (Fig. 14). See C)).

Following the ally character appearance effect of FIG. 14C, an effect display showing how the ally character throws an item toward the icon is performed. Specifically, for example, an effect display is performed in which a ally character possessing a green item jumps (see FIG. 14 (D)), and then the jumped ally character aims at the icon from the highest point and is green. An effect display is performed to show how the item is thrown (see FIG. 14 (E)).

Then, as the jumping ally character descends, an effect display is performed showing how the thrown green item gradually moves closer to the icon (FIG. 14 (E)). ~ (G)), the green item finally hits the icon, and the icon changes so that the display color becomes the same as the hit item (see FIG. 14 (H)).

Here, the display color of the icon has changed to green, but since the second configuration is adopted, the reach is always established after the successful icon change effect is performed, and the final result is established. In addition, it will develop into SP reach, SPSP reach, or story reach.

In addition, here, the explanation was given using an icon change success effect using a green item as an example, but the color of the item possessed by the ally character is limited to green if it is a color higher than the display color of the icon. It may be blue, red, or gold. For example, when the green icon is displayed, the icon change success effect using the higher red item or the golden item may be performed, while the lower blue item is used. The icon change success effect will not be performed.

<Specific examples of rewind suggestion effect and failure rewind effect>
Subsequently, specific examples of the rewinding suggestion effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failed rewinding effect (see FIG. 13D) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a screen view showing specific examples of the rewind suggestion effect and the failed rewind effect.

FIG. 15A is a screen view illustrating the icon change failure effect, in which the green item thrown by the ally character flies beyond the area 52, and as a result, the green item displayed in the area 52. It is illustrated that the display color of the icon does not change. Until the middle of this icon change failure effect, the same effect as the icon change success effect is performed. Specifically, the effect display until the ally character who possesses the item appears, the ally character jumps and throws the item, and the item flies toward the icon is the same as the icon change success effect. This is done (see FIGS. 14 (D)-(F)). Then, in the case of the icon change failure effect, the item deviates from the trajectory toward the icon and falls into a region different from the region 52 (see FIG. 15A). That is, the icon change failure effect of the present embodiment is realized by performing the effect display of FIG. 15 (A) following the effect display of FIGS. 14 (D) to (F).

Note that FIG. 15 shows how the game ball wins the first start port 11 during the icon change failure effect, and the second hold icon is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 51. ..

Here, the sub CPU 131 is responsible for finally changing the display color of the icon to gold, and performing the higher-level icon change success effect using the golden item after the icon change failure effect using the green item. If it is set at the start of fluctuation, the following effect display is performed following the above icon change failure effect (see FIG. 15A). That is, while the ally character who failed to hit the green item on the icon is displayed on the right end of the LCD screen 5, another character appears on the left end of the LCD screen 5 and says "one more time!" An effect display is performed to show how the dialogue is uttered (see FIG. 15 (B)). Since this effect display is an effect that suggests that the icon change success effect for the icon is performed after the icon change failure effect for the icon is performed, the icon change failure effect is rolled up. It can be said that it has a function as a rewind suggestion effect that suggests that it is returned.

In addition, in FIG. 15B, a state in which the rewind suggestion effect is realized by the effect display showing the state in which another character appears and utters the line "one more time!" Is illustrated, but other In the embodiment of the above, for example, the rewind suggestion effect may be realized by performing an effect display showing how the hour and minute hands of the clock rotate counterclockwise to rewind the time. That is, as long as it can be suggested that the icon change failure effect is rewound, the effect content of the rewind suggestion effect may be anything.

Next, following the rewind suggestion effect of FIG. 15 (B), the failure rewind effect of rewinding the icon change failure effect to the start point of the icon change failure effect is performed (see FIGS. 15 (C) to 15 (G)). ). Specifically, an effect display is performed such that the icon change failure effect performed in the order of FIGS. 14 (D) to 14 (F) and FIG. 15 (A) is reproduced in reverse. The speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced in reverse is the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced, that is, a series of effects shown in FIGS. 14 (C) to 14 (G) and FIGS. 15 (A) related to the icon change failure effect. The display is the same as the playback speed. However, the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced in reverse may be faster than the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced, or may be slower than the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced.

As described above, in the failed rewinding effect, first, an effect display is performed in which the item returns to a state where it is placed at a position immediately before falling into a region different from the region 52 (see FIG. 15C). Next, along with an effect display showing how the ally character returns to the highest reaching point, an effect display showing how the item returns to a position close to the hand of the ally character located at the highest reaching point is performed ( (See FIGS. 15 (D) to 15 (F)). Then, an effect display is performed to show how the ally character who catches the item descends to the position before jumping (see FIGS. 15 (F) to (G)).

By the way, if the effect image related to the failed rewind effect is displayed in the same color as the effect image related to the icon change failure effect that is the rewind target, the icon change failure effect and the rewind suggestion effect are inserted. The player may be confused with the failed rewinding effect, and the player may not be able to clearly recognize that the failed rewinding effect is being performed. That is, there is a possibility that the player cannot be easily notified that the icon change failure effect is being rewound.

Therefore, for example, by making the display mode (size and shape of the effect image) of the effect image related to the failed rewind effect different from the display mode of the effect image related to the icon change failure effect, both effects are clearly distinguished. Can be applied.
However, when this configuration is applied, the relationship between the icon change failure effect and the failure rewind effect becomes weak, and in the end, the same problem as described above may occur.

Therefore, in the game machine 1 in the present embodiment, when the failure rewinding effect is performed for the icon change failure effect, the size and shape of the effect image (friend character or item) related to the failure rewind effect is changed by the icon. The color of the effect image related to the failure rewind effect is different from the effect image related to the icon change failure effect without changing the effect image (friend character or item) related to the failure effect. Specifically, in the icon change failure effect, white ally characters and green items are displayed, whereas in the failure rewind effect, gray ally characters and gray items are displayed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the failure rewinding effect of rewinding the icon change failure effect to the point before the end of the icon change failure effect (in the present embodiment, the start time of the icon change failure effect). Is done.

As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 15 (C) to 15 (G), three small pieces are used to notify that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner even during the execution of the failure rewinding effect. The symbol continues to rotate at high speed, and the failure rewinding effect does not rewind the variable display of the three small symbols.

Further, in FIG. 15A, when the item thrown by the ally character passes over the icon and falls into the area on the left side of the area 52, the hold icon display area 51 is determined to have the first special symbol. An example shows that a second hold icon related to hold is newly displayed. On the other hand, by the rewinding effect exemplified in FIGS. 15 (C) to 15 (G), the effect is rewound before the ally character throws the item, that is, before the state shown in FIG. 15 (A) is reached. However, the hold icon display area 51 has not returned to the state before the second hold icon was displayed.
As is clear from this, it can be said that the hold icon newly displayed during the icon change failure effect is not subject to the failure rewind effect.

<Specific example of successful production of high-ranking icon change>
Subsequently, a specific example of the success effect of changing the upper icon (see FIG. 13 (F)) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is a screen view showing a specific example of the success effect of changing the upper icon.

After the failure rewinding effect is performed, the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) is performed in the following flow. Specifically, the color of the ally character who has returned to the jumped position returns to white, and the possessed item (green item) is changed to a higher item (for example, a golden item). (See FIG. 15 (H)).

In the decorative symbol display area 50, the left 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle of the failed rewinding effect (see FIG. 15 (C)), and then the right 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped to establish reach (FIG. 15 (G)). )), Immediately after the reach is established, the success effect of changing the upper icon is started.

Next, an effect display is performed in which the ally character who changed the item to a golden item jumps (see Fig. 16 (A)), and then the jumped ally character aims at the icon from the highest point and the golden item. An effect display showing the state of throwing is performed (see FIGS. 16A and 16B).

Then, as the jumping ally character descends, an effect display is performed showing how the thrown golden item gradually moves closer to the icon (FIG. 16 (B)). ~ (D)), the golden item finally hits the icon, and the icon changes so that the display color becomes the same as the hit item (see FIG. 16E).

In addition, in FIG. 15 (H) and FIG. 16, the golden item is described in a manner different from that of the green item in size and shape, but these items have the same size and shape as each other. There may be.

Further, here, the display color of the icon is changed to gold, but since the above-mentioned third configuration is adopted, after the icon change success effect is performed, the SPSP reach or story is finally performed. It will develop into reach.

16 (F) and 16 (G) exemplify how the normal reach is developed and the introduction effect of the SPSP reach is performed.

After the failure rewind effect is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (C)) is performed using the same color item used for the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)). Although it may be performed, this icon change success effect is performed in the same manner as the upper icon change success effect except that the color of the item used and the color of the icon that changes due to the hit of the item are different. .. Therefore, a specific example of the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)) following the failure rewind effect will not be described in detail here.

[Characteristics related to failure rewinding effect]
The failure rewinding effect has the following main features.
That is, the failed rewinding effect is characterized in that the effect is performed using a relatively narrow display area of the area 52 and a part of the decorative symbol display area 50.

In addition, after the failure rewinding effect is performed, before the failure rewinding effect is performed, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than before the failure rewinding effect is performed. An icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)) or an icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) that changes the display color of the icon to the icon higher than the icon is performed.
Therefore, the player can recognize that the display color of the icon changes to a higher display color at the time when the failure rewind effect is performed, and the higher icon change success than the icon change success effect. It is possible to enjoy the subsequent game while expecting the production to be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reproduced is the same as the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is played in reverse in the failure rewind effect. ..

Further, during the icon change failure effect, the corresponding effect sound corresponding to the icon change failure effect is output from the speaker 24, whereas when the failure rewind effect for the icon change failure effect is performed. There is a feature that a dedicated production sound peculiar to the failed rewinding effect is output instead of outputting the effect sound that reversely reproduces the corresponding effect sound.

When the failed rewinding effect is being performed, the effect display related to the failed rewinding effect is rewound, while the effect display related to other effects is not rewound. Specifically, although the effect display for reverse playback is performed for the ally characters and items used for the failed rewind effect, the effect display for reverse playback of the decorative pattern and the effect related to the decorative pattern is performed. There is no. Specifically, regarding the decorative symbols, when the failure rewinding effect is being performed, the left 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 15 (C)), and then the right 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped to reach. The effect display that holds is performed (see FIGS. 15 (D) to (G)), and it is clear that the symbol variation display using the decorative symbol is not rewound during the failed rewind effect. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 (C) to 15 (G), during the failure rewinding effect, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed counterclockwise, and the failure rewinding effect causes the three small symbols. There is no effect display in which the design rotates clockwise.

Further, when the number of hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 51 increases during the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 15A), until the start of this icon change effect (that is, before the number of hold icons increases). Even if the effect is rewound, the failed rewind effect does not reduce the number of hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 51 (FIGS. 15 (C) to 15 (G)). reference).

Further, although not shown in the figure, on the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, as an effect of displaying a background image, an effect display showing a state in which a main character and a ally character walk together is performed. Even if the failure rewind effect is performed while the effect display related to this background image is being performed, the reverse of the effect display related to the background image is such that the main character and the ally character return to their original positions. No regeneration takes place.

Further, FIG. 15 illustrates a state in which the failure rewinding effect is performed before the normal reach is performed, but the failure rewinding effect is also performed at other timings such as the timing of developing from the normal reach to the SP reach. It is possible. Then, even if the failure rewinding effect is performed at the timing of developing from the normal reach to the SP reach, the effect display related to the reach development proceeds as it is without being rewound. Here, the effect display related to reach development is an effect display in which three small symbols are rotated counterclockwise at high speed, and as shown in FIGS. 9 (C) and 9 (D), the reach symbols (left symbol and right) are used. This is an effect display or the like in which the decorative symbol display area 50 is moved from the decorative symbol display area 50 to the upper left and the upper right, respectively, while the symbol) is reduced, and these reach symbols are pseudo-stopped in the display area after the movement.

[Transformation example related to icon change effect]
In the present embodiment, a case where the failure rewinding effect of rewinding the effect to the start time of the icon change failure effect is performed as an example, but in other embodiments, the icon change failure effect is performed at an intermediate time point (for example,). , The time when the ally character throws the item) may be performed to rewind to the point of failure rewinding. In this case, the icon change success effect may be started from the middle of the icon change failure effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a rewind suggestion effect (see FIG. 13 (C)) is performed prior to the failed rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) will be described, but in other embodiments, the rewind is performed. It is also possible to perform the failure rewinding effect without performing the suggestion effect.

Also, instead of the ally character, other objects such as tanks and airplanes may be displayed, and the bullets fired from these objects may be used as items. That is, with respect to the icon change success effect, the icon change failure effect, and the failure rewind effect, these effects may be performed using an object different from the ally character or item.

In addition, in a situation where the failure rewinding effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) is not performed, the icon change success effect is always performed when the ally character A appears, while the icon change success effect is performed when the ally character B appears. , You may adopt the configuration which can execute both the icon change success effect and the icon change failure effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the failure rewinding effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)) or the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)). (See) will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the higher-level icon change effect is always performed after the failure rewind effect is performed (the icon change success effect is not performed). The configuration may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon change failure effect is not performed after the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) is performed, but in other embodiments, the failure rewind effect is performed. In some cases where this is done, a configuration may be adopted in which the icon change failure effect is subsequently performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case of performing the failure rewinding effect of reversely reproducing the effect display related to the icon change failure effect will be described, but in other embodiments, the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced. Instead, the icon change failure effect may be performed to cue the effect to a predetermined time point (for example, the start time of the icon change failure effect) of the icon change failure effect. That is, a failure rewinding effect may be performed such that the effect display at the end of the icon change failure effect is directly switched to the effect display at the start of the icon change failure effect.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reproduced is the same as the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is played in reverse in the failure rewind effect. However, these speeds may differ from each other. That is, in the failure rewinding effect, the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reproduced in reverse may be faster or slower than the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reproduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, a dedicated effect sound for the failure rewind effect is output during the failure rewind effect, but in other embodiments, a corresponding effect corresponding to the icon change failure effect is output during the failure rewind effect. The effect sound that reproduces the sound in reverse may be output from the speaker 24.

[Flow of reach rewinding effect for reach effect]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the flow of the reach rewinding effect, which is the rewinding effect performed for the reach effect, will be described. Here, FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the reach rewinding effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect may be performed before the reach is established or after the reach is established. This pseudo-ream effect is an effect that makes it appear that the decorative symbol is fluctuated multiple times during one variable display of the special symbol, and it is said that the greater the number of times the pseudo-ream effect is performed, the higher the jackpot reliability. The configuration is adopted. Specifically, the pseudo-continuous production is not performed when the pseudo-continuous production is performed once during the one-time variable display of the special symbol and the production finally develops to the pseudo-second series. The jackpot reliability is higher than in the case. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous production is performed twice during the one-time variable display of the special symbol and the production finally develops to the pseudo-third station, the production is finally performed up to the pseudo-second station. The jackpot reliability is higher than when it develops.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous effect, a reach rewind effect that rewinds a predetermined reach effect is performed. The reach rewinding effect having a function as this pseudo continuous effect is performed in the following flow. That is, first, a special symbol called a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a large size in the center of the decorative symbol display area 50 (see FIGS. 17 (A) and 18 (D)).

After this pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, both the reach rewinding effect (see FIG. 17 (B)) and the reach reproduction effect (see FIG. 17 (D)), which will be described later, are performed, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed. It can be said that the effect has a function of suggesting the execution of both the reach rewind effect and the reach reproduction effect.

Next, following the display of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the reach rewinding effect is performed (see FIG. 17 (B)). This reach rewinding effect is a rewinding effect for a plurality of effect images related to the reach effect, and in the present embodiment, a decorative pattern displayed during the reach effect, a character appearing during the reach effect, and the like are displayed. Reach rewinding effect is performed as a target. This reach rewinding effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, when the reach rewind effect is performed, the effect image (decorative pattern or character) related to the reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed, except for the small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 53. A freeze effect is performed in which the product is allowed to stand still for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) in the rewound state (see FIGS. 17 (C), 19 (A), and (B)).

Then, following the freeze effect, a reach reproduction effect is performed in which the effect image related to the reach effect is reproduced from a time point after rewinding (see FIGS. 17 (D) and 19 (C) to (E)). When this reach reproduction effect is performed, it develops into a lower reach (for example, SP reach) (see FIG. 17 (E)) or an upper reach (for example, SPSP reach or story reach) (FIG. 17 (Fig. 17). See F)).

<Specific examples of reach rewinding effect and reach reproduction effect>
Next, specific examples of the reach rewinding effect and the reach reproduction effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. Here, FIG. 18 is a screen view showing a specific example of the reach rewinding effect. FIG. 19 is a screen view showing a specific example of the reach reproduction effect performed after the reach rewind effect.

FIG. 18A illustrates how normal reach is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 52. Specifically, at the end of the normal reach, the scroll speed of the middle row symbol row decreases in a state where the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the decorative symbol display area 50 as the reach symbols, which is the same as the reach symbol. The state immediately after the middle symbol of the number passes on the effective line is illustrated. Further, during this normal reach, the white icon is displayed in the area 52 (see FIG. 18A).

When the middle symbol with the same number as the reach symbol passes on the valid line, the scroll speed of the middle row symbol row increases and high-speed scrolling resumes, making it difficult to identify the middle symbol displayed in the middle row. Become. At that time, the reach symbols (here, the three symbols on the left and the three symbols on the right) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are reduced while maintaining the reach state, while the upper left region and the upper right of the liquid crystal screen 5 are reduced. A development suggestion effect is performed that suggests that the main character and the enemy character will develop into the first half battle by moving to each of the areas of (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). In this development suggestion effect, as illustrated in FIGS. 18B and 18C, the main character who battles with the enemy character appears from the left end of the LCD screen 5 and moves to the center of the LCD screen 5. An effect display is performed to search for enemy characters.

Note that FIG. 18B illustrates a state in which the icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon automatically changes from white to red at the timing of development from normal reach to SP reach.

Here, when the pseudo continuous effect is performed, it is suggested that the effect object 7 moves to a predetermined effect position in front of the liquid crystal screen 5 and rotates, and at the same time, the pseudo continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The characters "NEXT" (pseudo-continuous pattern) are displayed in large size in the center of the screen. Although not shown in the figure, an effect image showing the clock is displayed behind the characters "NEXT", and the minute hand and the minute hand rotate counterclockwise and then rotate clockwise. The counterclockwise rotation of the minute hand and the minute hand suggests the execution of the reach rewinding effect (see FIGS. 17B and 18E to 18H), and the clockwise rotation of the minute hand and the minute hand. Suggests the execution of the reach reproduction effect (see FIGS. 17 (D) and 19 (C) to (E)).

When the effect display using the characters "NEXT" and the image of the clock is performed, the characters "x2" (pseudo-what) are displayed in the upper left of the liquid crystal screen 5 to suggest that the effect has evolved into a pseudo-second effect. The number of pseudo stations indicating whether or not the station is a station is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, orange). Then, as the reach rewinding effect, the effect display using the main character and the effect display of rewinding (reversely reproducing) the symbol variation effect using the decorative symbol are performed (FIGS. 19 (E) to 19 (E) to (Fig. 19). See H)). This reach rewinding effect is performed using the decorative symbol display area 50 of the liquid crystal screen 5.

Regarding the effect display using the main character, the effect display is performed in which the main character, which had moved to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in order to search for the enemy character, returns to the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of appearance and disappears from the liquid crystal screen 5. (See FIGS. 18 (E) and 18 (F)). The main character displayed during this reach rewinding effect is the same character as the main character displayed during the development suggestion effect, but is displayed in a different color (gray in this embodiment) from this main character. It differs in that.

Regarding the symbol variation effect using one of the decorative symbols, first, the upper left region and the upper right of the liquid crystal screen 5 are returned so as to return from the state shown in FIG. 18 (B) to the state shown in FIG. 18 (A). The purple left 3 symbols and right 3 symbols moving to the direction area are displayed as gray left 3 symbols and right 3 symbols (see FIG. 18 (E)). Then, after these gray left 3 symbols and right 3 symbols are erased from the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIGS. 18 (F) and 18 (G)), the left 3 symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 in the reach development. , Middle 4 symbols, middle 3 symbols, and right 3 symbols all begin to be displayed as gray decorative symbols, and move slowly toward the upper part of the liquid crystal screen 5 integrally (see FIGS. 18 (G) and 18 (H)). ).

Note that FIG. 18 (H) shows that the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 has returned to the state immediately after the medium symbol having the same number as the reach symbol has passed on the effective line. However, since each of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 is displayed as a gray decorative symbol, the arrangement of the decorative symbols is the same as that shown in FIG. 18 (A). It is possible for the player to easily recognize that the decorative design is different from that shown in FIG. 18A.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the reach rewinding effect is being performed, the effect display that reversely reproduces the symbol variation effect using the decorative symbol and the effect display that uses the character are reversely reproduced. The effect display is performed.

While the reach rewinding is in progress, the effect display related to the decorative symbol or character is played in reverse, but the display of "x2" indicating the number of pseudo-reams, the icon displayed in the area 52, and the hold icon display area. The effect display related to the hold icon displayed on 51 is not played in reverse. This also applies to the small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53, and each small symbol continues to rotate at high speed even while the reach rewinding effect is being performed (FIG. 18 (A). )-(H)).

When the effect display is rewound to the time point shown in FIG. 18A by the reach rewind effect, a freeze effect is performed (see FIGS. 19A and 19B). Specifically, an effect display is performed in which each of the gray decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 in the arrangement shown in FIG. 18 (H) is stationary for a predetermined time (2 seconds in the present embodiment). While this freeze effect is being performed, all the effect images displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 are stationary for 2 seconds except for each small symbol that continues to rotate at high speed in the small symbol display area 53.

Although not shown in the figure, "x2" indicating the number of pseudo-reams, which is the pseudo-ream number, in the period in which the reach rewind effect is performed and the period in which the freeze effect is performed. All the effect images displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed in gray except for the characters and each small symbol display area 53 displayed in the small symbol display area 53. As a result, it is possible to effectively give the player the impression that the production has rewound and the time has stopped.

Next, at the end timing of the freeze effect, the reach reproduction effect is performed (see FIGS. 17 (D) and 19 (C) to (E)). Specifically, first, all the effect images displayed in gray, including each decorative symbol that was stationary in the decorative symbol display area 50, begin to be displayed in the original color, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 begins to be displayed. Fluctuation display is resumed. That is, the gray left three symbols and the right three symbols that have been stationary become purple, which is the original display color, and start a pseudo stop. Further, in the middle row, after the gray middle 3 symbols and the middle 4 symbols become purple and blue, which are the original display colors, respectively, the scroll display of the middle row symbol row including these middle rows at low speed is performed. Is started.

As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the normal reach is resumed from that point in time by returning the effect to a predetermined point in time (see FIG. 18 (A)) by the reach rewind effect. is there.

It should be noted that, after the scroll display of the symbol row in the middle row is started, when the middle symbol showing the same number as the reach symbol (here, 3 symbols) passes on the effective line, it is illustrated in FIG. 18 (B). The same development suggestion effect as above is performed (see FIG. 19 (D)). That is, the scroll speed of the middle row symbol row increases and high-speed scrolling is restarted, making it difficult to identify the middle symbol, and the LCD screen while the reach symbols (here, the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols) are reduced. Move to the upper left and upper right of 5. Then, the main character appears from the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5, moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and a development suggestion effect is performed to search for the enemy character.

Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol this time, the sub CPU 131 performs one pseudo continuous effect (reach rewind effect) during the SP reach to rewind the reach effect, and finally the SPSP reach ( When the variable effect pattern to be developed to the upper reach of FIG. 17 (F) is set, the development effect suggesting the development to SPSP reach (see FIG. 19 (F)) and the introduction effect of SPSP reach (FIG. 19). (See (G)) and. Since these development effects and the introduction effects of SPSP reach are the same effects as those described above based on FIGS. 11 (C) and 11 (D), detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

At the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol this time, the sub CPU 131 performs one pseudo continuous effect (reach rewind effect) during the SP reach to rewind the reach effect, and finally the SP reach ( When the variable effect pattern to be developed to the lower reach of FIG. 17 (E) is set, following the effect display of FIG. 19 (E), FIGS. 10 (H) and 11 (A) relating to the SP reach. ), A series of effect display of FIG. 11B is performed, and a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is performed at SP reach.

[Characteristics related to reach rewinding effect]
The reach rewinding effect has the following main features.
That is, since the characters appearing in the decorative symbols and reach effects are used in the reach rewind effect, a relatively wide display area in which these decorative symbols and characters are displayed (at least a display area including the decorative symbol display area 50). The feature is that the reach rewinding effect is performed using.

Further, in the reach rewind effect, the effect display (decorative symbol, character, background image) related to the symbol display effect using the decorative symbol is reproduced in reverse, while being displayed in the small symbol display area 53. Since each small symbol continues to rotate at high speed until it develops into SPSP reach (or story reach), there is a feature that the effect of reversely reproducing the fluctuation of each small symbol is not performed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 18, the display color of the icon changes from white to red when developing from normal reach to SP reach (see FIG. 18 (B)), but the icon is wound in reach. It continues to be displayed in red even when the rewinding effect is performed or even after the reach rewinding effect rewinds the reach effect before the development of the SP reach by the reach rewinding effect (for example, FIGS. 18 (E) to (H), FIG. 19 (A)-(C)). As described above, there is a feature that the reach rewinding effect does not reversely reproduce the icon changing effect such as returning the icon from red to white before the change.

Further, during the reach rewinding effect, there is a feature that the display of the number of pseudo-reams and the effect of reversely reproducing these effect displays are not performed for the icon and the hold icon. That is, for example, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 11 and a new hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51 while the reach rewind effect is being performed, the reach rewind during execution is being performed. The effect is that the display of the hold icon display area 51 is not returned to the state before the hold icon is displayed (FIGS. 18 (F) to (H), FIGS. 19 (A) to 19 (A) to (). E) See).

Further, since the effect of reversely reproducing the effect display related to the hold icon is not performed, for example, after the icon change effect of changing the hold icon from white to green is performed, this icon change effect is performed. Rewinding the reach effect to the previous point The feature is that the display color of the hold icon is not returned from green to white by performing the reach rewind effect. Further, since the effect of reversely reproducing the effect display related to the icon is not performed, for example, after the icon change effect of changing the icon from green to gold is performed, this icon change effect is performed. Rewinding the reach effect to the previous point The feature is that the display color of the icon is not returned from gold to green by performing the reach rewind effect.

In addition, after the reach rewind effect is performed, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than before the reach rewind effect is performed, a higher reach (for example, SPSP reach or story) is used. There is a feature that a development effect (see FIG. 19F) that suggests development to reach) may be performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the development effect is performed after the reach reproduction effect is performed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned reach rewinding effect is performed twice based on FIG. 18 during one variation display of the first special symbol, and finally up to the pseudo third station. The production may develop, and in this case, the above-mentioned development production is easier to be performed than in the case where the reach rewinding effect is performed only once and the production is finally developed only up to the pseudo second station. There is.
Therefore, when the reach rewinding effect is performed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the reach rewinding effect is performed again.

Further, the present embodiment is characterized in that the speed at which the effect display related to the reach effect is reproduced is the same as the speed at which the effect display related to the reach rewind effect targeting the reach effect is reproduced in reverse. ..

Further, during the reach effect, the reach effect sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speaker 24, whereas when the reach rewind effect for the reach effect is performed, the reach effect sound is output. The feature is that the special production sound peculiar to the reach rewind production is output instead of the production sound that reproduces the reverse.

[Modification example of reach rewinding effect]
In the present embodiment, the reach rewinding effect is performed to rewind the reach effect from the time when the development suggestion effect related to the SP reach effect is performed to a temporary point (see FIG. 18 (A)) in the middle of the normal reach. Although the case will be described as an example, in another embodiment, for example, a reach rewind effect may be performed in which the effect display related to the reach effect is reversely reproduced until the reach establishment timing that triggers the start of the normal reach. Further, for example, when SPSP reach is performed, a reach rewind effect that reversely reproduces the effect display related to the reach effect until the middle of the SP reach, or a reach winding that reversely reproduces the effect display related to the reach effect until the middle of the normal reach. A return effect may be performed. That is, the rewinding start time point at which the rewinding of the reach rewinding effect is started and the end time point at which the rewinding of the reach rewinding effect is finished may be different from the time points illustrated in the present embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the pseudo continuous effect functions as the reach rewind effect has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the reach rewind effect may be performed separately from the pseudo continuous effect. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a reach rewind effect is performed in which the effect display related to the predetermined reach effect is reversely reproduced will be described, but in other embodiments, the effect display related to the reach effect is not reproduced in reverse. , A reach rewinding effect may be performed to cue the effect to a certain point in the predetermined reach effect. That is, a reach rewinding effect may be performed such that the effect display at the start of rewinding in the predetermined reach effect is directly switched to the effect display at the end of rewinding in the reach effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the speed at which the effect display related to the predetermined reach effect is reproduced is the same as the speed at which the effect display related to the reach rewind effect targeting the reach effect is reproduced in reverse. These speeds may be different from each other. That is, in the reach rewinding effect, the speed at which the effect display related to the predetermined reach effect is reproduced in reverse may be faster or slower than the speed at which the effect display related to the predetermined reach effect is reproduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, a dedicated effect sound peculiar to the reach rewind effect is output during the reach rewind effect, but in other embodiments, the target reach effect is output during the reach rewind effect. The effect sound that reversely reproduces the reach effect sound may be output from the speaker 24.

[Termination conditions for time-saving game status]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the end condition of the time-saving game state will be described. Here, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an end condition for ending the time-saving game state. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, conditions for terminating the time saving game state are defined for each type of time saving number of times given by a big hit or a small hit, and information indicating these conditions is stored in the main ROM 102. Therefore, the main CPU 101 controls to end the time-saving gaming state based on the information stored in the main ROM 102.

<End condition peculiar to one time reduction>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is "big hit" and "7R time reduction 1 time big hit" is selected as the type of the jackpot, One time reduction is given (see FIG. 6 (C)). That is, when the number of times of the second special symbol determination performed in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game including the 7R long open round game is performed reaches one, the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. State control is performed to shift.

"7R time reduction 1 big hit" is 1 / 7.5 (1 / 7.5 (1 / 7.5) in any of the 1st 2nd special symbol judgment and the 4th hold of the 2nd special symbol judgment, a total of 5 times of the 2nd special symbol judgment. = 40/300) This is a big hit prepared on the assumption that the player aims to attract a small hit (see FIG. 6B). For this reason, if the time-saving game state is continued until the second special symbol determination is performed two or more times, the second special symbol determination is performed a total of six times or more, which is more advantageous to the player than expected. There is a risk that the game quality will collapse.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of "7R time saving one big hit", the gaming state is set on the condition that the number of times of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state reaches one. It is decided to shift from the time-saving game state to the normal game state.

<End condition peculiar to 5 times reduction>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is "big hit" and "7R time reduction 5 times big hit" is selected as the type of the jackpot, Five time reductions are given (see FIG. 6 (C)). That is, when the number of times of the second special symbol determination performed in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is performed reaches five times, the state control for shifting the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is performed. ..
In addition, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" and "4R time reduction 5 times small hit" or "12R time reduction 5 times small hit" is selected as the type of the small hit, 5 times Time saving is given (see FIG. 6 (D)). That is, when the number of times of the second special symbol determination performed in the time-saving game state after the big-hit game following the small-hit game reaches 5, the game state is shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. State control is performed.

"7R time reduction 5 times big hit", "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", or "12R time reduction 5 times small hit" is a total of 5 times 2nd special symbol judgment and 4 times 2nd special symbol judgment pending It is a big hit (or small hit) prepared on the assumption that the player aims to allocate a small hit of 1 / 7.5 in any of the 9th special symbol judgments (Fig. 6 (B)). )reference). For this reason, if the time-saving game state is continued until the second special symbol determination is performed 6 times or more, the second special symbol determination is performed 10 times or more in total, which is more advantageous to the player than expected. There is a risk that the game quality will collapse.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, when "7R time saving 5 times big hit", "4R time saving 5 times small hit", or "12R time saving 5 times small hit" is obtained, the second is performed in the time saving game state. On condition that the number of special symbol determinations reaches 5, the gaming state is changed from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

<End conditions common to 1 time reduction and 5 time reductions>
Further, in the present embodiment, when five time reductions or one time reduction is given, the number of times of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol performed after the game shifts to the time reduction game state after the end of the jackpot game. The game state is shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state on condition that the total number of times including the number of determinations reaches 12 times.

By the way, in the left side area of the game area 10, a gate for making a normal symbol determination is not provided, and if the player does not make a right-handed hit, the normal symbol determination is not performed. Further, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the normal gaming state or when the jackpot game related to the first special symbol determination is performed. In this normal game state, even if it is determined in the normal symbol determination to operate the slide member 17, the slide member 17 is placed in the guide position only for 0.036 seconds, and the player strikes right during the jackpot game. Even if this is done, the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 12, and the right to determine the second special symbol is not reserved. This is not limited to the case where the judgment result of the first special symbol determination becomes "big hit" and the big hit game is executed, but the judgment result of the second special symbol determination becomes "small hit" and the small hit game The same applies to the case where the jackpot game following is executed.

Therefore, for example, when the above-mentioned jackpot game is completed while the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the time is shortened because the right of the second special symbol determination is basically not reserved. In the game state, the first special symbol determination is first performed. On the other hand, if the time-saving game state is terminated on the condition that the first special symbol determination is performed once after shifting to the time-saving game state for the jackpot with one time-saving number of times. The hold related to the second special symbol determination cannot be accumulated, and the game quality may be greatly disrupted. This is a case where, for example, an unfamiliar player makes a left-handed instead of a right-handed in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, and as a result, the first special symbol determination is performed one or more times. Is the same.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the above-mentioned problem, when the time saving of 5 times or the time saving of 1 time is given, the first time after shifting to the time saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state is continued until the total number of times of the 1 special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination reaches 12 times, and the time-saving gaming state is terminated on the condition that the time-saving gaming state is reached.

<End condition peculiar to 100 times of working hours>
Further, in the present embodiment, when 100 times of time reduction is given, that is, when "7R time reduction 100 times big hit" or "16R time reduction 100 times small hit" is given, the game shifts to the time reduction game state after the big hit game is completed. The game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state on condition that the total number of times of the first special symbol judgment and the number of times of the second special symbol judgment performed after that has reached 100 times. It is supposed to be.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment ends the time-saving gaming state at the timing when the first (or fifth) variation display of the second special symbol ends with respect to the time-saving 1 time (or time-saving 5 times). It is supposed to be. Therefore, the player can store the hold of the second special symbol determination on condition of four when the first (or fifth) variation display of the second special symbol is performed.

On the other hand, as an end condition for 100 times of time reduction, a condition that the time reduction game state is terminated when the number of times of the second special symbol determination in the time reduction game state reaches 100 times is stipulated, and the time reduction is once (or time reduction). If the same end control as in the case of (5 times) is performed, the second special symbol determination will be performed a total of 104 times at the maximum, which is excessively advantageous to the player.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end condition that the time-saving game state is terminated when the number of times of the second special symbol determination in the time-saving game state reaches 100 times is not stipulated.

<End condition common to all time reductions>
In addition, the result of the second special symbol judgment is "small hit", and "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", "12R time reduction 5 times small hit", or "16R time reduction 100 times small hit" is selected as the type of small hit. If so, a small hit game is performed in which the small winning opening 19 is opened.

By the way, based on the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the player can perform the above three types of small hits. It is possible to identify which of the small hits has occurred. That is, the player decides whether this small hit is a small hit that is disadvantageous to him (a small hit in which the number of time reductions is set to "5"), or whether he / she is a small hit based on the stop-displayed small hit symbol. It is possible to determine whether it is an advantageous small hit (a small hit in which the number of time reductions is set to "100" times).

Here, for example, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game of the small hit game, the small hit game is completed only by not executing the big hit game following the small hit game. If a configuration is adopted in which the time-saving game state is continued if the time-saving number of times remains after that, the following problems may occur. That is, when the player sets, for example, the number of time reductions to 100, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed every time the determination result of the second special symbol determination becomes "small hit". If you specify the type and it is disadvantageous to you, such as "4R time reduction 5 times small hit" or "12R time reduction 5 times small hit", do not let the V winning opening switch 198 win the game ball during the small hit game, and vice versa. In addition, only in the case of "16R time reduction 100 times small hit" which is advantageous to oneself, the time reduction of 100 rotations is given by making the V winning opening switch 198 win the game ball during the small hit game "16R time reduction 100 times". There is a possibility that it will be possible to make a strategy such as continuously generating "small hits".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game of the small hit game, the game state is changed to the time-saving game state at the end of the big hit game performed following the small hit game. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the big hit game following the small hit game is not executed, and the game state is changed to the time-saving game state after the small hit game is completed. I will not let you. In the present embodiment, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the game state setting process for setting the game state to the time-saving game state (see steps S745 and 48 in FIG. 47) is performed. By not executing the accompanying big hit game, control is realized in which the game state is not changed to the time-saving game state after the small hit game is completed.

[Screen display during small hit game]
Next, the screen display during the small hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. Here, FIG. 21 is a time chart for explaining the screen display during the small hit game. FIG. 22 is a screen view showing a specific example of the screen display during the small hit game.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, as illustrated in FIG. 21, the opening period (“OP” in FIG. 21) continues for a predetermined period (13 seconds in the present embodiment). Period "). Then, when the opening period ends, the slide member 191 operates in a predetermined opening pattern as the opening game (see FIG. 21). Specifically, the slide member 191 repeats a short opening operation of opening the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds and then closing the small winning opening 19 four times with a predetermined interval period (for example, 2.4 seconds). Then, after the fourth short opening operation is performed, the interval period is shortened to, for example, about 1.227 seconds, and the slide member 191 is closed after opening the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds. Is repeated 6 times at intervals of about 1.227 seconds. As a result, the small winning opening 19 will be opened 10 times in total during the opening period of 15 seconds.

On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the following screen display is performed. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 21, at the beginning of the opening period of the small hit game, the small hit type display (see FIG. 22 (A)) for notifying the type of the small hit is performed for 5 seconds, followed by A right-handed suggestion display (see FIG. 22B) that urges the player to hit right is performed for 6 seconds. Then, when 11 seconds (= 5 seconds + 6 seconds) have elapsed from the start of the opening period, a V area instruction image for displaying a V area instruction image indicating the V area (the inner area through which the game ball of the V winning opening switch 198 passes) is displayed. The display is performed (see FIG. 22C).

When the small hit type display is performed, the dedicated effect sound peculiar to the small hit type display is output from the speaker 24, and when the right-handed suggestion display is performed, the dedicated effect peculiar to the right-handed suggestion display is performed. Sound is output from the speaker 24. The same applies when the V area instruction display is performed, and when the V area instruction display is performed, a dedicated effect sound peculiar to the V area instruction display is output from the speaker 24, and this dedicated effect sound is output. Is a production sound different from the dedicated production sound peculiar to the right-handed suggestion display, which makes it easier for the player to more clearly recognize that the right-handed strike is prompted.

Since this V area instruction display is started 2 seconds before the start of the open game, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the open game will be started, and the right-handed instruction display can be used. It is possible to more effectively encourage a player who has not made a right-handed hit.

By the way, as described above based on FIG. 20, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, not only the big hit game following the small hit game is not performed, but also the game state is changed. It is an extremely disadvantageous situation for the player who does not shift to the time-saving game state and the player cannot hold the hold related to the second special symbol determination. Therefore, it is extremely important for the player to suppress the non-passage of the game ball with respect to the V winning opening switch 198.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the gaming ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 even after a predetermined time (7 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the open game, V An image different from the area instruction display is displayed. Specifically, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 even after 7 seconds have passed from the start of the open game, a predetermined time before the end of the open game (3 seconds before in the present embodiment). Is used as a reference time, and the remaining time countdown display is performed to display a countdown image that counts down the remaining time until the reference time (see FIG. 21).

If the remaining time countdown display is started while the V area instruction display is being performed, the remaining time from the speaker 24 is replaced with the dedicated production sound peculiar to the V area instruction display, although it is not shown in the figure. The output of the dedicated production sound peculiar to the time countdown display is started.

<Specific example of V area instruction display and remaining time countdown display>
Subsequently, a specific example of the V area instruction display and the remaining time countdown display will be described with reference to FIG. 22. First, at the beginning of the opening period of the small hit game, for example, a small hit type display is performed in which the characters "Challenge BONUS" and a predetermined character congratulating the small hit are displayed (see FIG. 22 (A)). Then, following the small hit type display, a predetermined right-handed suggestion display is performed (see FIG. 22 (A)). Specifically, for example, an arc-shaped arrow that imitates the path that the game ball moves by hitting right and an effect image that shows how a predetermined character emits a voice "Aim at the right!" Are displayed. ..

Then, 2 seconds before the start of the open game, the V area instruction display is started (see FIG. 22C). Specifically, a front view image of the small winning opening 19 including the V winning opening switch 198 and the inside thereof viewed from the front is displayed in the lower right area of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the large character "Aim for V" is displayed on the liquid crystal display. An animation showing how the triple arrow, which is displayed in the lower left area of the screen 5 and has three arrows including the word "right-handed" superimposed and displayed, moves from the upper left to the lower right is above the LCD screen 5. Is displayed on.

If the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, this V area instruction display is continued until the open game is completed (see FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the inside of the small winning opening 19 during the open game passes through the V winning opening switch 198, the V winning notification effect (see FIG. 22 (G)) corresponding to the passage is started. The V area instruction display is terminated.

Next, if the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 at the timing when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the open game, the remaining time countdown display is started (FIGS. 22 (D) and (E)). reference). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 22 (D), the characters "remaining until the end", the number "4.98" indicating the remaining time until the above reference time on the right side, and "until the end". A band-shaped image including the characters "remaining 4.98" and a plurality of characters "right-handed →" arranged vertically above and below the numbers is superimposed and displayed on the V area instruction image related to the V area instruction display.

When this remaining time countdown display is performed, a plurality of "right-handed →" characters flow from left to right, and a number indicating the remaining time to the reference time with the passage of time is 0. An animation display related to the remaining time countdown display is performed so that the countdown is performed every 01 seconds (see FIGS. 22 (D) and 22 (E)).

Unless the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 on the way, the number indicating the remaining time until the reference time decreases from "5.00" to "0.00" in increments of 0.01. However, this number is displayed in blue when it indicates a value between "5.00" and "3.00" (see FIG. 22 (D)), and "2.99" to "0.00". When the numerical value between is shown, it is displayed in red (see FIG. 22 (E)). That is, in the remaining time countdown display, the display mode (color in the present embodiment) of a number indicating the remaining time until the reference time changes at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the remaining time countdown display.

Next, if the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 even after 5 seconds have passed since the remaining time countdown display was started, the remaining time countdown display ends and the V area instruction display is displayed. It becomes a trap (see FIG. 22 (F)).

Here, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 while the V area instruction display is being performed, a V winning notification effect for notifying the V winning of the game ball is performed (see FIG. 22 (G)). Specifically, for example, the panel lamp 25 (see FIG. 4) arranged near the small winning opening 19 and the V winning opening switch 198 emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern, and on the liquid crystal screen 5, the liquid crystal screen 5 radiates from the V region. An effect display showing how the light is diffused is performed (see FIG. 22 (G)), and the V area instruction display is terminated accordingly.

When the V area instruction display is performed before the remaining time countdown display is started (see FIG. 22C), the same V winning notification is also notified when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198. The production is performed, and the V area instruction display is terminated accordingly. Further, when the V area instruction display and the remaining time countdown display are performed at the same time (see FIGS. 22 (D) and 22 (E)), the same V winning is also obtained when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198. The notification effect is performed, and the V area instruction display and the remaining time countdown display are terminated accordingly.

By the way, in a configuration such as performing a remaining time countdown display in which the remaining time until the end timing is displayed as a countdown based on the end timing of the open game, the following problems may occur. That is, for example, assuming that it takes, for example, about 2 seconds for the game ball hit by the player to reach the V winning opening switch 198 from the launching device, the remaining time until the end timing is 1 second. Even if a right-handed hit is made after that, the game ball will reach the small winning opening 19 only after the open game is completed. For this reason, it is not possible to pass the game ball through the V winning opening switch 198, or even to make the small winning opening 19 win the game ball, and as a result, the right to shift to the time-saving game state is extinguished. It will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the V winning opening switch 198 (for example, 2 seconds) is longer than the average time (3 seconds in the present embodiment). ) The previous time is set as the reference time, and the remaining time countdown display is performed to count down the remaining time until the reference time. Therefore, even if the player hits the right after the remaining time indicated by the remaining time countdown display approaches 0 seconds, basically, the game ball hit right against the V winning opening switch 198. It is possible to pass it.

In FIG. 22 (H), when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the game ball is V-winned in the ending period of the small hit game immediately after the open game is completed. It is illustrated that a challenge failure effect is being performed to notify that the player has failed. Specifically, for example, an animation showing how the left door moving to the right and the right door moving to the left abut at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 and the front is closed is displayed, and the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed. In the center of, the word "End" is displayed, suggesting that the challenge has failed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 at the timing when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the open game, The remaining time countdown is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of non-V winning that the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the interval period during which the slide member 191 remains in the small winning opening 19 in the middle of the open game is shortened (see FIG. 21). Specifically, the interval period from the short opening operation of opening the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds to the next short opening operation is shortened from 2.4 seconds to about 1.227 seconds. Will be done. Therefore, after the interval period is shortened, the game ball that has moved to the top of the slide member 191 that closes the small winning opening 19 is subjected to the next short opening operation as compared with before the interval period is shortened. The time to stay on the slide member 191 is shortened. Therefore, the synergistic effect of the remaining time countdown display and the shortening of the interval period can further enhance the effect of suppressing the occurrence of non-V prizes.

<Modification example of V area instruction display and remaining time countdown display>
The following configuration may be adopted for the remaining time countdown display. That is, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed time from the start of the open game reaches a predetermined time (7 seconds in the present embodiment), the characters "remaining until the end" and a number indicating the remaining time until the reference time are displayed. The case where the remaining time countdown image including the above is displayed will be described, but in other embodiments, an image different from the remaining time countdown image may be displayed. For example, instead of the remaining time countdown image, when the elapsed time from the start of the open game reaches a predetermined time, a character that utters a line such as "The remaining time is short. Aim for V soon!" Is displayed. You may do it. That is, the image displayed when the elapsed time from the start of the open game reaches a predetermined time is the remaining time countdown image as long as it can effectively encourage the player to hit right. May be different images.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the V area instruction display and the remaining time countdown display are simultaneously performed, but the game ball is the V winning opening switch 198 even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the open game. If it has not passed, the V area instruction display may be temporarily interrupted and the remaining time countdown display may be started. In this case, it is preferable that the remaining time countdown image related to the remaining time countdown display includes an instruction image indicating the V region.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the right-handed suggestion display is switched to the V-region suggestion display two seconds before the start of the open game will be described, but in other embodiments, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed. The above switching may not be performed by changing the display mode to have the same function as the V region suggestion display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the V area instruction display is continued until the end of the open game will be described, but even if a right-handed hit is made immediately before the end of the open game, the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198. Since it is difficult to make the player, the V area instruction display may be ended before a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds before) the end of the open game.

<Modification example of the end condition of the time saving game state>
In the present embodiment, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game following the small hit game is not executed, and the control is performed so as not to shift to the time saving game state. To do. On the other hand, in other embodiments, as in the case of the first special symbol determination, all the hits related to the second special symbol determination are per type, that is, the so-called type 1 type 1 type gaming machine. A configuration similar to the form may be applied. In this case, in, for example, 50% of the hits (per type) related to the first special symbol determination, a jackpot game including a V-round game in which the V winning opening switch 198 is opened for a long time so that the game ball can pass is executed. For the remaining 50% of each type, a jackpot game including a V-round game in which the V winning opening switch 198 is shortly opened when the game ball cannot pass (or is difficult to pass) is executed. Then, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the V round game, another round game following the V round game is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to the "probability change game state". Set to. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the V-round game, another round game following this V-round game is executed, but the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to "time reduction". Set to "Game state".
Here, in the "probability variation game state", the probability of being determined to be per type (big hit probability) is higher than in the normal game state, and the game ball is the second starting port as in the time-saving game state in the present embodiment. It is a gaming state in which it is easy to win a prize in 12.

[Example of screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the time-saving game state]
FIG. 23 is a screen view illustrating the screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the time-saving game state. When the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, as illustrated in FIG. 23, the liquid crystal screen 5 is formed with the decorative symbol display area 50 and the small symbol display area 53 as in the normal game state. Further, a right-handed suggestion image 54, a movement bar 55, a movement icon 56, and a pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 are displayed.

When the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, it is necessary to perform a right-handed strike aimed at the gate 16 and the second starting port 12, so a right-handed strike suggestion that prompts the player to make a right-handed strike. The image 54 is displayed at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen 5.

<Small symbol display area 53>
The small symbol display area 53 is an area in which three small symbols that rotate counterclockwise with the variable display of the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) are displayed, and is the usual area described above based on FIG. 7. It is the same display area as the small symbol display area 53 formed in the gaming state. Since the right-handed suggestion image 54, which is not displayed in the normal game state, is displayed in the time-saving game state, the small symbol display area 53 is formed at a position slightly lower than in the normal game state (FIG. 7). And FIG. 23).

<Move bar 55 and move icon 56>
The movement bar 55 corresponds to one change display of the second special symbol, and when the change display of the second special symbol is started, the movement icon 56 located at the left end of the movement bar 55 moves to the right. Start moving towards. Here, when the number of time reductions is set to 1, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed according to the first second special symbol determination performed after the transition to the time reduction game state (hereinafter, "this variation"). Since the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, up to four holds related to the second special symbol determination can be accumulated. On the right side of the movement bar 55, an area for displaying a hold suggestion icon displayed in the number corresponding to the number of holds for the second special symbol determination is provided, and each time the right for the second special symbol determination is held, the area is provided. A hold suggestion icon is displayed. FIG. 23 suggests that when the change is being performed, three game balls are won in the second starting port 12 during the change, and three holds related to the second special symbol determination are accumulated. Therefore, a state in which three hold suggestion icons are displayed is illustrated.

The hold suggestion icon related to the second special symbol determination displayed on the movement bar 55 does not move like the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination displayed in the hold icon display area 51, and the hold icon does not move. It is not subject to icon change effects (icon change success effects and icon change failure effects).

When the number of time reductions is set to 1, the movement icon 56 that started moving at the timing when the main fluctuation starts slowly moves to the right with the passage of time, and is in the middle of the main fluctuation. It reaches the vicinity of the right end of the moving bar 55 (see FIG. 27 (A)). Then, when the movement icon 56 reaches the vicinity of the right end of the movement bar 55, a challenge battle effect (see FIG. 24 (H)) described later is started. This challenge battle effect is one of the judgment results of a total of five second special symbol judgments, that is, the first second special symbol judgment corresponding to this fluctuation and the four reserved second special symbol judgments. It is a production performed to notify whether or not it is a "small hit".

That is, conventionally, it is common to perform a variation effect on each of the above five second special symbol determinations and notify the winning (whether or not it is a small hit) for each second special symbol determination. However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one challenge battle effect (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24)) is used to notify whether or not any of the five determination results of the second special symbol determination is a "small hit". H)) is adopted. Then, when any of the determination results of the five second special symbol determinations is a "small hit", a victory effect (see FIG. 24 (K)) is executed as a result effect of the challenge battle effect, and the fifth fifth. 2 When there is no "small hit" in the determination result of the special symbol determination (when all are lost), the defeat effect (see FIG. 24 (I)) is executed as the result effect of the challenge battle effect.

<Pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57>
The pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 displays the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol performed in the time-saving game state with a small number (or a natural number).

(When the number of time reductions is 1)
When the number of time reductions is 1, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long (for example, 130 seconds) is always selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction (final variation). .. This is to urge the player to strike right during the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation, and to accumulate four holds related to the second special symbol determination. Then, while the variation display of the second special symbol (the above-mentioned main variation) is being performed, the variation display of the second special symbol in the time-saving game state is performed a plurality of times in the decorative symbol display area 50. In order to make the decorative symbol appear to be, a pseudo shortening variation is repeatedly performed in which the decorative symbol is displayed for a period shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) and then pseudo-stopped (for example, 1 second).
In this way, by repeating the pseudo shortening fluctuation during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol once, it is possible to make the player feel as if the hold related to the second special symbol determination is reduced. Can be effectively encouraged to hit right. In other words, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from performing a stop hit without launching the game ball during one variation display of the second special symbol.

Then, each time the pseudo shortening variation is started, the numerical value shown by the pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 decreases by 0.1. In the present embodiment, when the number of time reductions is 1, the initial display of the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 is “1.0”. Therefore, when a total of 10 pseudo-shortening fluctuations are performed, the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 The value indicated by is 0.0, and the challenge battle production is started.

(When the number of time reductions is 5)
When the number of time reductions is 5, from the 1st rotation of the time reduction to the 4th rotation of the time reduction, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol is medium (for example, 30 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the 2nd special symbol. Will be done. Then, while the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed, in the decorative symbol display area 50, the variation display is performed for a time shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (for example, 2 seconds) (for example, 0. 5 seconds) Pseudo shortening fluctuation for pseudo stop is repeated.

When the number of time reductions is set to 5, the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "small hit" (or big hit), and the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "missing". In a part of, the reach by the decorative symbol is established by one of the pseudo shortened fluctuations repeated during the one-time variation display of the second special symbol, and the reach effect performed when the reach is established is a hit (small hit). Or jackpot) or notify the loss.
It should be noted that which pseudo-shortening variation of the pseudo-shortening variation that is repeatedly performed determines which pseudo-shortening variation is used to establish the reach depends on the variation pattern of the second special symbol and the effect pattern selected for this variation pattern.
On the other hand, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "missing" and it is decided not to perform the reach effect, the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is obtained without establishing the reach in any pseudo shortening fluctuation. Notify that it is a "loss".

By adopting such a configuration, when the number of time reductions is less than 100 times and the time reduction is given only 5 times, the second special symbol determination is performed more than the actual time by repeating the pseudo shortening fluctuation. It can be made to look like it is, and a high effect can be obtained.

It should be noted that this pseudo shortening variation is characterized in that it is not performed during the variation display of the second special symbol when the number of time reductions is set to 100 times.

Returning to the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 of FIG. 23, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 decreases by 0.1 each time the pseudo-shortening variation is started. In the present embodiment, when the number of time reductions is 5, the initial display of the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 is "5.0", and when the first variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the pseudo-variation number is simulated. Each time the shortening fluctuation is started, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 decreases by 0.1 to "4.9", "4.8", and "4.7". The move icon 56 moves to the right on the move bar 55. Then, when the determination result of the first second special symbol determination is "missing", the numerical value indicated by the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 becomes "" when the variation display of the first second special symbol ends. As it decreases to 4.0 ”, the move icon 56 reaches the right end of the move bar 55. Then, when the second special symbol variation display is performed for the second time, the movement icon 56 returns to the initial position, and each time the pseudo shortening variation is started, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 is "4". It decreases by 0.1 to "0.0", "3.9", and "3.8", and the movement icon 56 moves to the right on the movement bar 55 accordingly. Then, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "missing", the numerical value indicated by the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 becomes "" when the variation display of the second second special symbol ends. As it decreases to "3.0", the movement icon 56 reaches the right end of the movement bar 55. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" (or "loss"), the numerical value indicated by the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 becomes "3.0", that is, , The reach is established before the movement icon 56 reaches the right end of the movement bar 55, and after the predetermined reach effect is performed, the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) is performed.

It should be noted that the fifth rotation of the time reduction when the number of time reductions is 5 is the same as that always performed in the above-mentioned variation when the number of time reductions is 1, so the description here will be omitted.

(When the number of time reductions is 100)
When the number of time reductions is 100, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. In this way, when the number of time reductions is 100, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively short, so that the pseudo shortening variation performed when the number of time reductions is 1 or the number of time reductions is 5 is It will never be done. Therefore, the movement bar 55 and the movement icon 56 are not displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the number of time reductions is 100, the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 is displayed as in the case where the time reduction number is 1 or 5, but the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 is displayed. The initial display is "100", and the numerical value indicated by the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 decreases by "1" each time the variation display of the second special symbol is started. That is, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination continues to be "missing", the numbers indicated by the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 decrease to "99", "98", and "97". I will go.
On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is 100, the pseudo shortening variation is not performed, so that the movement bar 55 and the movement icon 56 are not displayed during the variation display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions is 100, it is sufficient to allocate 1 / 7.5 small hits within 100 rotations, so that it is easy to generate small hits. Therefore, even when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relative as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, as in the case of "loss". A short (eg, 2 second) variation pattern is selected. Therefore, when the number of time reductions is 100 and the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the decorative symbol and the small symbol are changed and displayed instead of establishing the reach and performing the reach effect. Immediately after that, the decorative design and the small design of doublet are stopped immediately.

[About RUSH Challenge Battle]
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to clearly notify whether or not the player enters the RSUH state in which it is easy to assign a small hit by giving a time reduction of 5 times or 100 times, a RUSH challenge battle is performed. A series of named productions is performed (see FIG. 24).

In this RUSH challenge battle, if one time reduction is given and the judgment result of the first second special symbol judgment is "missing" after shifting to the time reduction game state, the second special of the first rotation It is performed so as to straddle the variation display of the symbol (for example, a long variation of 130 seconds) and the variation display of the second special symbol four times, which is performed when the reserved second special symbol determination is digested (figure). 25 (B) and (C)).

In addition, in the RUSH challenge battle, if one time reduction is given and the judgment result of the first second special symbol judgment after shifting to the time reduction game state is "small hit", the first rotation is the first. 2 It is performed during the variation display of the special symbol (for example, a long variation of 130 seconds) (see FIG. 25 (A)).

On the other hand, if the time reduction of 5 times is given and the judgment results of the 5th second special symbol determination performed after the transition to the time reduction game state are all "missing", the second special of the 5th rotation The RUSH challenge battle straddles the fluctuation display of the symbol (for example, a long fluctuation of 130 seconds) and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol four times, which is performed when the reserved second special symbol judgment is digested. Will be done.

In addition, when the time reduction of 5 times is given and the judgment result of the 2nd special symbol judgment of the 5th time after the transition to the time reduction game state is "small hit", the change of the 2nd special symbol of the 5th rotation A RUSH challenge battle is performed during the display (for example, a long fluctuation of 130 seconds).

[Flow of RUSH Challenge Battle]
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the RUSH challenge battle. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed in the normal gaming state is "big hit" and "7R time saving 1 big hit" is selected as the jackpot type, After the jackpot game in which the seven long open round games are performed, the RUSH challenge battle is produced according to the flow illustrated in FIG.

When the jackpot game of 7R is completed and the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the first charge promotion effect (see FIG. 24 (A)) is first performed. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment basically adopts a configuration in which a gaming ball does not win a prize at the second starting port 12 when the game is controlled in a normal gaming state or when a jackpot game is being performed. There is. Therefore, immediately after the transition to the time-saving game state, the second special symbol is in the stopped state, and the number of pending second special symbol determinations is also in the “0” state. Therefore, in order to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the first charge promotion effect (see FIG. 26 (A)) for urging the player to hit right is performed.

When the player makes a right-handed hit in response to the first charge promotion effect and the game ball wins in the second starting port 12, the first variation in the time reduction is started (see FIG. 26 (B)). Specifically, the variable display of the second special symbol, the high-speed scroll display of the three symbol rows in the decorative symbol display area 50, and the high-speed rotation of the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 are started at the same time ( See FIG. 26 (B)).

In this way, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the above-mentioned moving bar 55 is displayed at the lower end of the liquid crystal screen 5 based on FIG. 23 (see FIG. 24C). Then, the movement icon 56 is displayed at the left end of the movement bar 55 (see FIG. 24D).

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a series of RUSH determination results of the second special symbol determination of five times in total of the second special symbol determination of one time reduction and the second special symbol determination of four times held. A configuration is adopted in which the result of the challenge battle is notified, but the victory effect (see FIG. 24 (K)) or the defeat effect (see FIG. 24 (I)), which is the result effect of the RUSH challenge battle, is shortened by 1 It starts from the second special symbol variation display (see FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (C)). For this reason, at the predetermined timing (the timing at which the victory effect or the defeat effect is started) during the variable display of the second special symbol in the first time reduction, the four priors related to the four second special symbol determinations that are held are held. It is necessary to acquire the judgment information in advance and decide whether to perform the result production of the victory effect or the defeat effect.

Therefore, in order to start the victory effect or the defeat effect from the variable display of the second special symbol in the first time reduction, the player is made to make a right-handed strike in order to accumulate the hold of the second special symbol judgment up to the upper limit of four. There is a need.

Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol for the first time reduction is started, the second charge promotion effect for causing the player to hold the hold of the second special symbol determination is performed (FIG. 24 (E), FIG. See FIG. 26 (D)).

When the player makes a right-handed hit in response to this second charge promotion effect, the second special symbol is determined every time the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 12, because the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The right is reserved, and accordingly, the same number of hold suggestion icons as the number of hold of the second special symbol determination is displayed in the right area of the movement bar 55.

In this way, when the number of holds for the second special symbol determination reaches "4" and four hold suggestion icons are displayed on the movement bar 55, the hold for the second special symbol judgment is up to four, which is the upper limit. A charge completion suggestion effect suggesting that the charge has been accumulated is performed (see FIGS. 24 (F) and 26 (E)).

Although not shown in FIG. 24, when the above-mentioned pseudo shortening fluctuation is repeated and the numerical value indicated by the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 becomes “0.0”, the movement icon 56 moves to the vicinity of the right end of the movement bar 55. , The same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped in the decorative symbol display area 50, and reach is established (see FIGS. 24 (G) and 27 (B)). Then, a challenge battle effect in which the main character and the enemy character battle is started (see FIGS. 24 (H), 27 (D) to (G), and 28 (A)).

Then, when the challenge battle is over and it is time to start the victory effect or the defeat effect, the sub CPU 131 fluctuates transmitted from the game control board 100 in order to determine whether to perform the victory effect or the defeat effect. The following decision processing is performed based on the start command and the hold command. Specifically, based on the information included in the fluctuation start command received from the game control board 100 when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the second special symbol of the first time reduction of this time is started. It is specified whether or not the judgment result of the judgment is a "small hit". Further, when the reserved second special symbol determination is performed based on the prior determination information included in the hold command received from the game control board 100 each time the second special symbol determination is suspended, " Identify whether or not it is judged as a "small hit". Then, based on these two specific results, it is determined whether the result effect of the victory effect or the defeat effect is to be performed.

When the sub CPU 131 specifies that the determination result of the second special symbol determination of the first time reduction this time is "missing" and all the determination results of the four reserved second special symbol determinations are "missing". , It is decided to perform a defeat effect (see FIG. 24 (I)). In this case, a predetermined challenge end effect is performed after the defeat effect is performed following the challenge battle (see FIG. 24 (J)).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination of the first time reduction this time is a "small hit", the sub CPU 131 determines to perform a winning effect (see FIG. 24 (K)). In this case, the small hit game (see FIG. 24 (L)) is started after the victory effect is performed following the challenge battle.
Further, in the sub CPU 131, the determination result of the second special symbol determination of the first time reduction this time is "missing", and any of the four pending determination results of the second special symbol determination is "small hit". Similarly, when it is specified that there is, it is decided to perform a victory effect (see FIG. 24 (K)).

It should be noted that this victory effect is started during the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction, but as is clear from the description regarding the above two cases where it is decided to perform the victory effect, this implementation is carried out. In the gaming machine 1 of the form, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination related to the first time reduction of this time is "small hit", the winning effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation. .. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination related to the first time reduction is "missing", the same victory effect as the above victory effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first time reduction. It has the characteristic of being victorious (see FIGS. 25 (A) and 25 (B)).

[Specific example of RUSH challenge battle]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the RUSH challenge battle will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. Here, FIG. 25 is a time chart for explaining the effect performed during the RUSH challenge battle and the display mode of the small symbols. 26 to 30 are screen views showing specific examples of the RUSH challenge battle.

FIG. 26A exemplifies a state in which the above-mentioned first charge promotion effect is performed based on FIG. 24 immediately after the jackpot game related to the first special symbol determination is completed and the game shifts to the time-saving game state. Has been done. Immediately after the jackpot game is completed and the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the right to determine the second special symbol is not obtained at all. When the right to determine the first special symbol is not reserved, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are suspended. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 53, the same doublet small symbols that were actually stopped before the jackpot game was started are in the main stopped state.

The first charge promotion effect of the present embodiment is to display a charge promotion image in which the characters "right-handed" are superimposed on the upper left of the large right-pointing arrow including the characters "CHARGE" in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. It is realized (see FIG. 26 (A)). Further, here, since the state shifts to the time-saving game state of one time-saving according to the "7R time-saving one-time jackpot" related to the first special symbol determination, the pseudo-variation number suggestion image showing the number "1.0" is shown. Is displayed at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 26 (A)).

When the player strikes right and the game ball wins the second starting port 12 in the situation where the first charge promotion effect is being performed, the second special symbol determination is executed. Then, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started so that the three symbol rows scroll from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display area 50, and the small symbol display area is started. At 53, high-speed rotation of the three small symbols is started (see FIGS. 26 (A) and 26 (B)).

Since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol is the start of the first pseudo shortened variation, the number indicated by the pseudo variation number suggestion image is "1" as the variation display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is started. It changes from "0.0" to "0.9" (see FIGS. 26 (A) and 26 (B)). Further, as soon as the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is started, the movement bar 55 and the movement icon 56 are displayed, and the movement of the movement icon 56 is started (FIGS. 26 (B) to (C) and 24. (B)-(D)).

When the movement of the movement icon 56 is started, the second charge promotion effect is started (see FIGS. 26 (D) and 24 (E)). In the present embodiment, in the second charge promotion effect, a reduced image in which the display content is the same as the charge promotion image used for the first charge promotion effect and the charge promotion advance image is reduced is used (FIG. 26). (A) and (D)). In addition, in FIG. 26 (D), the player makes a right-handed hit, the game ball wins in the second starting port 12, the number of pending second special symbol determinations becomes “1”, and the right area in the moving bar 55. It is illustrated that one hold suggestion icon is displayed in.

When the number of holds for the second special symbol determination reaches the upper limit of "4" while the second charge promotion effect is being performed, the number of hold suggestion icons displayed in the right area of the movement bar 55 becomes four, and the charge is charged. A completion suggestion effect is performed (see FIGS. 26 (E) and 24 (E)). In the present embodiment, this charge completion suggestion effect is realized by changing the characters of "CHARGE" in the reduced image used for the second charge promotion effect to "MAX".

Next, when it is time to pseudo-stop the decorative symbols with respect to the first pseudo shortening variation, the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a mode showing loss (“213” in FIG. 26 (F)) (FIG. 26 (F)). (See), when these decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time, the three symbol rows are restarted and the second pseudo shortening variation is started (see FIG. 26 (G)). With the start of the second pseudo-shortening variation, the numerical value shown by the pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57 decreases by 0.1 to become “0.8” (see FIGS. 26 (F) and 26 (G)). Then, when it is time to pseudo-stop the decorative drawing with respect to the second pseudo shortening variation, the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a mode showing loss (“824” in FIG. 26 (H)), and then the third pseudo-stop. Shortening fluctuations are started.

In FIG. 27 (A), as a result of repeating the pseudo shortening variation 10 times, the number indicated by the pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 becomes “0.0”, and the movement icon 56 is near the right end of the movement bar 55. 9 symbols (9 symbols on the left) pseudo-stop in the left column of the decorative symbol display area 50, and the same 9 symbols (9 symbols on the right) slowly move from above in the right column, and reach is reached with 9 symbols. It is illustrated that the reach establishment fanning effect that raises the player's expectation for the establishment is being performed.

As a result of this reach establishment fanning effect, when the same right 9 symbols as the left 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped on the effective line, the reach is established (see FIGS. 27 (B) and 24 (G)). When the reach is established in this way, a development suggestion effect suggesting that the game develops into a challenge battle effect is performed (see FIG. 27 (C)). Specifically, the background image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is changed to a solid white background image, and the reach symbols (9 symbols in this case) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are erased. Along with this, the left small symbol and the right small symbol make a pseudo stop in a manner showing the same number as the reach symbol (here, "9"), while the small and medium-sized symbols continue to rotate at high speed (see FIG. 27 (C)). ).

When the development suggestion effect is performed, the movement bar 55 and the movement icon 56 displayed on the LCD screen 5 are erased, and the main character and the enemy character face each other to start the challenge battle effect (FIG. 27 (C)). And (D)). When the challenge battle production is started in this way, for example, an offensive / defensive production showing how the main character and the enemy character develop an offense and defense is performed (see FIG. 27 (E)). Then, for example, when approaching the middle stage of the challenge battle production, a telop display is performed in which the lines emitted by the main character and the enemy character are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 27 (F)). In addition, FIG. 27 (F) illustrates a state in which a telop display in which an enemy character emits a line is performed. Further, in this telop display, there are cases where the characters of the dialogue are white and red, and the latter case has a feature that the jackpot reliability is higher than the former case.

Next, when the final stage of the challenge battle production is approaching, a fanning production is performed that raises the player's expectation that the main character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle (see FIG. 27 (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 27 (G), an effect display is performed showing how the beam rays emitted from the weapon (ray gun) changed by the main character are heading toward the enemy character.

When the fanning effect of FIG. 27 (G) is performed, the operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 28 (A)). In this operation promotion effect, the valid period during which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid is set in advance. For example, a button image imitating the effect button 26 and "press !!" to prompt the player to operate the effect button 26. A letter and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

<When the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment related to the first rotation of the time saving is a small hit>
Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed when the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is started is "small hit", the game is played against the operation promotion effect. In response to the operation of the effect button 26 by the person, a victory effect suggesting that the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving is a "small hit" is performed (see FIG. 28 (B)). ). Specifically, the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 in the reach mode are pseudo-stopped in a manner showing doublet (here, "999"), and the main character defeats the enemy character. The characters "Destroy!" And the hero character who won the battle are displayed.

If the player does not operate the effect button 26 within the valid period, the winning effect is started according to the expiration of the valid period.

Then, in the decorative symbol display area 50 in which the decorative symbol is hidden, three decorative symbols showing the same doublet (here, "999") as the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 28 (C)). ). Here, there is a possibility that the three decorative symbols showing doublets of "999" may change due to the above-mentioned symbol promotion effect, and the three decorative symbols showing doublets of "999" are stopped as they are. Is not confirmed. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 53, high-speed rotation of the three small symbols is restarted as the three decorative symbols showing doublets of "999" start to stop pseudo-stopping (see FIG. 28 (C)). ..

Then, when "16R time reduction 100 times small hit" is selected as the type of small hit related to the second special symbol determination in the first rotation of the time reduction, three decorative symbols indicating doublets of "999" are displayed. It changes to doublet of "777" corresponding to "16R time reduction 100 times small hit", and along with this, three small symbols also showing doublet of "777" are pseudo-stopped. Then, as the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three decorative symbols and three doublets indicating "777" are displayed. The small symbols stop at the same time (see FIG. 28 (D)).
On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, when "12R time reduction 5 times small hit" is selected, the three decorative symbols showing doublets of "999" are "12R time reduction 5 times small hit". It changes to the doublet of "333" corresponding to, and along with this, the three small symbols also showing the doublet of "333" are pseudo-stopped. Then, as the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three decorative symbols and three doublets indicating the doublet of "333" are displayed. Small symbols stop at the same time.
When "4R time reduction 5 times small hit" is selected, the three decorative symbols showing doublets of "999" do not change, and the three small symbols showing doublets of "999" are displayed. Pseudo stop. Then, as the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three decorative symbols and three doublets indicating "999" are displayed. Small symbols stop at the same time.

FIG. 25A shows the movement of the second special symbol and the display performed using the decorative symbol display area 50 when the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is “small hit”. 6 is a time chart showing a correspondence relationship between the effect and the movement of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 53.

Up to this point, while referring to FIGS. 26 (A) to (H), FIGS. 27 (A) to (G), and FIGS. 28 (A) to (D), the determination of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving A series of effects when the result is a "small hit" have been described. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 25 (A), the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is performed. In the first half of the period (130 seconds in the present embodiment), the pseudo shortening variation using the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 is repeated, and in the small symbol display area 53, the three small symbols are rotated at high speed. ..

Then, when the reach is established, in the small symbol display area 53, the left small symbol and the right small symbol are pseudo-stopped in a manner showing the same number as the reach symbol (here, "9"), and the small and medium-sized symbols continue to rotate at high speed. To do. On the other hand, in the display area including the decorative symbol display area 50, the decorative symbol is hidden and the challenge battle effect is performed. Then, when the final stage of the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is approached, the above-mentioned victory effect is performed with the three small symbols indicating doublet stopped in a pseudo manner. Then, as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three decorative symbols showing doublets and the three small symbols are stopped.

<If everything is lost, including on hold>
In FIG. 25C, the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is “missing”, and the four second special symbols accumulated during the variation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction. The movement of the second special symbol, the display effect performed using the decorative symbol display area 50, and the small symbol display area 53 when the pre-judgment information corresponding to the hold of the determination all indicates "missing". It is a time chart which shows the correspondence relationship with the movement of a small symbol.

The judgment result of the second special symbol judgment related to the first rotation of the time reduction was "missing", and the hold of the second special symbol judgment accumulated during the variation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction was exhausted. In all cases, when all of them are "lost" (see FIG. 25C), the following effects are performed. Specifically, as is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 25 (A) and 25 (C), one rotation of the time reduction is performed until the challenge battle effect during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction is completed. An effect common to the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the eyes is "small hit" is performed. That is, an effect common to the series of effects shown in FIGS. 26 (A) to (H), 27 (A) to (G), and 28 (A) is performed.

On the other hand, if the judgment results of the second special symbol judgment related to the first rotation of the time saving and the four second special symbol judgments held for a total of five times are all "missing", the first rotation of the time saving first rotation. 2 At the end of the variable display of the special symbol, a defeat effect is performed instead of a victory effect (see FIG. 25 (C)). Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 26 for the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 28 (A), for example, a defeat effect showing that the main character is defeated in a battle with an enemy character and collapses. Is performed (see FIG. 28 (E)). Similarly, even if the player does not operate the effect button 26 within the valid period for the operation promotion effect, the defeat effect is performed according to the expiration of the valid period.

When this defeat effect is being performed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is being performed, and the judgment result of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is "missing", so that the small symbol In the display area 53, the three small symbols indicating the reach loss (for example, “919”) are pseudo-stopped (see FIGS. 28 (E) and 25 (C)).

Subsequently, as the lost symbol is stopped as the second special symbol that was being displayed in a variable manner, the challenge illustrated in FIGS. 28 (F) to (H) and 29 (A) to (F) ends. The production is performed (see FIG. 25 (C)). Specifically, as the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the same as described above based on FIG. 22 (H). First, an animation showing how the left door moving to the right and the right door moving to the left abut at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 and the front is closed is displayed, and an animation is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. Is displayed with the words "Challenge finished".

In addition, as the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the reach lost eye (here, "919") is shown at the time of the defeat production. The three small symbols that have been pseudo-stopped in the mode are stopped as they are (see FIGS. 28 (E) and 28 (F)).

Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is performed and the second special symbol is determined. As the symbol variation pattern, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is "miss". In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol having an extremely short fluctuation time of 1 second is selected, the three small symbols are accelerated by 1 second along with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold. It rotates (see FIG. 28 (G)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols indicating the disparity (here, "549") are finally stopped (FIG. 28). (H), see FIG. 25 (C)).

It should be noted that the screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained even after the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started and ended (see FIGS. 28 (F) to 28 (H)). ..

Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, the second special corresponding to the second hold The symbol is determined, and as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the second hold is "miss". In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol having an extremely short fluctuation time of 1 second is selected, the three small symbols are accelerated by 1 second along with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold. It rotates (see FIG. 29 (A)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols indicating the disparity (here, "416") are finally stopped (FIG. 29). (B), see FIG. 25 (C)).

It should be noted that the screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained even after the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to this second hold is started and ended (see FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (B)). ..

Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold, the second special corresponding to the third hold The symbol is determined, and as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is "miss". In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol having an extremely short fluctuation time of 1 second is selected, the three small symbols are accelerated by 1 second along with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold. It rotates (see FIG. 29 (C)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols indicating the disparity (here, "835") are finally stopped (FIG. 29). (D), see FIG. 25 (C)).

It should be noted that the screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained even after the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is started and ended (see FIGS. 29 (C) to 29 (D)). ..

Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold, the third hold corresponding to the last fourth hold. 2 The special symbol determination is performed, and as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the fourth hold is "miss". In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol having an extremely short fluctuation time of 1 second is selected, the three small symbols are accelerated by 1 second along with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold. It rotates (see FIG. 29 (E)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols indicating the disparity (here, "352") are finally stopped (FIG. 29). (F), see FIG. 25 (C)).

It should be noted that the screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained from the start to the end of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold (FIGS. 29 (E) to (F)). reference). Then, when a predetermined fixed time elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold, the left door and the right door are opened to reveal the normal screen corresponding to the normal game state. (See FIG. 29 (G)). At that time, the character "← Return the steering wheel to the left" prompting the player to return to left-handed is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the voice corresponding to the character is output from the speaker 24.

Up to this point, the challenge end effect has been described with reference to FIGS. 28 (F) to (H) and FIGS. 29 (A) to (F), but as is clear from the explanation, this challenge end effect is time-saving. After the stop display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first rotation is started, the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is stopped and displayed and continues until a predetermined fixed time elapses (FIG. 25). (C)). Then, while the screen display related to the challenge end effect is maintained, the disparity (here, "919") for notifying that the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment related to the first rotation of the time saving is lost is finally stopped. (See Fig. 28 (F)), and while the screen display related to the challenge end effect is also maintained, one is placed with a period in which the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is displayed in a variable manner. The loose eye (here, "549") for notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the hold of the eye is lost is finally stopped (see FIG. 28 (H)). Then, in the same state where the screen display related to the challenge end effect is maintained, the second hold corresponding to the second hold is sandwiched between the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is performed. The disparity (here, "416") that notifies that the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a loss has stopped (see FIG. 29 (B)), and the change of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold. With a period in which the display is performed, the disparity (here, "835") for notifying that the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the third hold is lost is finally stopped (FIG. 29 (Fig. 29). See D)). Finally, while the screen display related to the challenge end effect is also maintained, the fourth hold is supported with a period in which the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is displayed in a variable manner. The disparity (here, "352") for notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss is stopped (see FIG. 29 (F)).

On the other hand, in this way, the decorative symbol may not be displayed while the challenge end effect is performed over the five stop display periods in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. Instead, the small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are used to intermittently notify that the determination results of the five second special symbol determinations are lost.

For this reason, it is difficult for the player to notice that the second special symbol determination corresponding to the four holds is being digested in order while the challenge end effect is being performed, and a total of five second special symbols including the four holds are used. It is possible to effectively perform one challenge end effect for notifying that all the determination results of the determination are lost.

<When the first rotation of the time saving is lost and there is a small hit in the hold>
In FIG. 25B, the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is “missing”, and the four second special symbols accumulated during the variation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction. When the pre-judgment information corresponding to the third hold of the pre-judgment information corresponding to the hold of the judgment indicates "small hit", the movement of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol display area 50 are used. It is a time chart which shows the correspondence relationship between the display effect performed by this and the movement of a small symbol in a small symbol display area 53.

The judgment result of the 2nd special symbol judgment related to the 1st rotation of the time saving is "missing", and the hold of the 2nd special symbol judgment accumulated during the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol of the 1st rotation of the time saving is consumed in order. When the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is "small hit" (see FIG. 25B), the following effect is performed. Specifically, as is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 25 (A) and 25 (B), one rotation of the time reduction is performed until the challenge battle effect during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction is completed. An effect common to the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the eyes is "small hit" is performed. That is, an effect common to the series of effects shown in FIGS. 26 (A) to (H), 27 (A) to (G), and 28 (A) is performed.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is "small hit", one rotation of the time reduction is performed at the end of the variation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction. Although the judgment result of the second special symbol determination related to the eyes is "missing", the winning effect is performed (see FIG. 25 (B)). Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 26 with respect to the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 28 (A), the same victory effect as shown in FIGS. 28 (B) to 28 (D) is performed. (See FIGS. 30 (A) and 30 (B)). Specifically, the characters "Destroy!", Which indicates that the main character has defeated the enemy character, and the state in which the main character who won the battle is pleased are displayed.

However, the winning effect exemplified in FIGS. 28 (B) to 28 (D) and the winning effect exemplified in FIGS. 30 (A) and 30 (B) are different from each other in the following points.
That is, the winning effect illustrated in FIGS. 28 (B) to 28 (D) is an effect performed for the purpose of notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving is a "small hit". Therefore, in the small symbol display area 53, the three small symbols in the mode showing doublets are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed.

On the other hand, the winning effect illustrated in FIGS. 30A and 30B is for the purpose of notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is a "small hit". It is a production performed in. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 53, the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation is "missing", and the determination result of any of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the four holds is "". In order to notify that it is a "small hit", the three small symbols indicating the reach loss (here, "9V9") in which the small and medium-sized symbols are "V" are pseudo-stopped, and then the main stop is performed (FIG. 30 (A)). And (B), see FIG. 25 (B)). When the small and medium-sized symbols are rotating at high speed, the small and medium-sized symbols momentarily indicate any number from 1 to 9, and do not indicate "V". Therefore, the display of the three small symbols including the small and medium-sized symbols indicating "V" such as the above "9V9" is, for example, the display of the small and medium-sized symbols indicating "1" which is originally displayed after "9". It is realized by replacing it with a small and medium-sized symbol indicating "V". This also applies to the case of displaying the loose stitches including the small and medium-sized symbols indicating "V".

In this way, when the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is completed and the three small symbols indicating the reach loss with the small and medium-sized symbols being "V" are stopped, these three small symbols are doublet. Since the eyes are not formed, the player can recognize that the determination result of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is "missing". In addition, although the three stopped small symbols do not form doublets, the small symbol of "V" suggesting that there is a second special symbol determination that is a small hit in the hold (small and medium in this embodiment). Since the symbol) is included, the player can recognize that some of the four holds related to the second special symbol determination are determined to be "small hits". is there.

However, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the decorative symbol display area while the winning effect shown in the screen drawings shown in FIGS. 30A and later is being performed. Therefore, when the winning effect is being performed, is the winning effect performed for the fact that the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is "small hit"? , It is not always easy to determine whether any of the four holds related to the second special symbol determination is made for being determined as a "small hit", so it is an extremely entertaining victory production. It is possible to execute.

Returning to the specific example of the victory effect, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is made. As a variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is "missing". In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol having an extremely short fluctuation time of 1 second is selected, the three small symbols are accelerated by 1 second along with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold. It rotates (see FIG. 30 (C)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the small and medium-sized symbols are "V", and the three small ones (here, "4V2") are shown. The symbol stops (see FIGS. 30 (D) and 25 (B)). Here, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 second, the three small symbols indicating the disparity in which the small and medium-sized symbols are "V" are stopped without being pseudo-stopped.

In addition, since a reach effect called a challenge battle effect was performed during the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving, when this variable display is completed, the small and medium-sized symbol is "V". The three small symbols indicating "9V9") are stopped. On the other hand, when the second special symbol determination corresponding to the hold is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short as 1 second, and the reach effect is performed. I will not be told. Further, regarding the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, even though the judgment result of the corresponding second special symbol determination is "missing", even before the variation display is started. The victory production has started. Therefore, it can be said that there is no need to perform a reach effect during the variable display of the second special symbol this time.
For this reason, after rotating the three small symbols at high speed for 1 second along with the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, although the medium symbol indicating "V" is included, it is not a reach loss. The three small symbols (for example, "4V2") showing the irregularities are to be stopped (see FIGS. 30 (D) and 25 (B)).

Although the winning effect has been performed before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, the screen display of the winning effect is maintained even after the variable display is finished. (See FIGS. 30 (A) to 30 (D)).

Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, the second special corresponding to the second hold The symbol is determined, and as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the second hold is "miss". In addition, since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol having an extremely short fluctuation time of 1 second is selected, the three small symbols are accelerated by 1 second along with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold. It rotates (see FIG. 30 (E)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the small symbol is "V". The symbol stops (see FIGS. 30 (F) and 25 (B)).

Although the winning effect has been performed before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to this second hold is started, the screen display of the winning effect is maintained even after the variable display ends. (See FIGS. 30 (E) to 30 (F)).

Next, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold, the second special corresponding to the third hold The symbol determination is performed, but here, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit". Therefore, as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time selected in the case of loss is not a short fluctuation pattern of 1 second, but a long fluctuation pattern of, for example, a long fluctuation time of 16 seconds. The variation pattern is selected. Then, in response to this, when the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is started, the small symbol display area 53 in the small symbol display area 53 is still maintained in the screen configuration of the winning effect. The high-speed rotation of the symbol is performed first (see FIG. 30 (G)).

When notifying that the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the third hold is "small hit", the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment related to the first rotation is "small hit". In order to make it difficult to distinguish from the case of notifying that there is, it is preferable to perform the same effect as in the latter case.

Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is performed, the same effect as shown in FIGS. 28 (C) to 28 (D) is performed. Specifically, in a state where the three small symbols are rotated at high speed as described above based on FIG. 30 (G), three decorative symbols showing doublets (for example, "666") are displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50. Pseudo stop. Then, while maintaining the state in which the three small symbols are rotated at high speed, the first movement display of the symbol promotion effect (see FIG. 12B) is started, and the second movement display of the symbol promotion effect (FIG. 12 (FIG. 12 (B)). In C)), the doublet of "777" (or the same doublet that has moved to the back side), which is different from the doublet that has moved to the back side, moves so as to pop out from the back side to the front. As a result, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped with doublets (for example, "777") indicating the same number (see FIG. 30 (H)). Then, as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols showing the same doublet are stopped at the same time.

Note that the pseudo stop display of the small symbol is not performed during the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold and the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold. On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation and during the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold in which the small hit is notified, the pseudo stop display of the small symbol is displayed. Is done in the same way.

[Characteristics of victory production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is to be executed in the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving, the hit notification effect for notifying that the small hit game is executed is shown in FIG. The winning effects illustrated in 28 (B) to (D) are performed. In this embodiment, this victory effect is configured as a character "defeat!" Indicates that the hero character has defeated the enemy character, and an effect display indicating that the hero character who has won the battle is pleased.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game is not executed in the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving (when the determination result is "missing"), it is illustrated in FIGS. 28 (B) to (D). There is a feature that the winning effect common to the winning effect is performed (see FIGS. 30A to 30B).

Further, when notifying that the small hit game is not executed during the execution of the winning effect illustrated in FIGS. 30A to 30B, it is determined that the small hit game is executed. In a mode suggesting that the right to determine a special symbol is reserved (three small symbols indicating reach loss including a medium symbol indicating "V"), the small symbol is characterized in that the small symbol is finally stopped (Fig. 30 (Fig. 30). B) See). And since the main stop of this small symbol indicates a reach loss such as "9V9" instead of doublet, it has a function as a suggestion effect suggesting that the small hit game is not executed. There is also.

Here, the case where the judgment result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is "small hit" has been described as an example, but for example, the second special corresponding to the fourth hold When only the judgment result of the symbol judgment is "small hit", the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is performed from the middle of the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving. A similar victory effect will be performed so as to straddle at the end of.

[About RUSH Challenge Battle in case of 5 times reduction]
Up to this point, when one time reduction is granted, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold, which is a small hit, ends from the start of the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction. I explained about the RUSH challenge battle that will be held until then. On the other hand, when the time reduction of 5 times is given, the production is performed in the following flow. That is, from the first rotation of the time reduction to the fourth rotation of the time reduction, an effect of individually notifying the winning (small hit or loss) is performed in each of the four fluctuation displays of the second special symbol. Then, for the second special symbol judgment of the fifth rotation of the time reduction and the four second special symbol judgments that are reserved, the same effect as the above-mentioned RUSH challenge battle performed when the time reduction of one time is given is performed. Be told. It should be noted that, only in the first rotation of the time saving, the immediate hit effect (see FIG. 31) described later can be executed on condition that at least the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit".

[Modification example of victory production]
The following configuration may be adopted for the winning effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, by displaying three small symbols indicating reach loss (or looseness) including a medium symbol indicating "V", the fluctuation becomes a loss, but a small hit is placed in the remaining hold. It is supposed to suggest that there is something that becomes. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when there is a small hit in the remaining hold, three small symbols showing reach loss (or loose eyes) that do not include the small symbol indicating "V". Is displayed, for example, a character or character indicating that a small hit exists in the remaining hold may be displayed, or the frame lamp 37 may be controlled to emit light in a specific light emitting pattern. However, in the case of adopting such a configuration, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination this time is "small hit", the above character or character display and the frame lamp 37 are specified. When the judgment result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" without controlling the light emission with the light emission pattern, the above characters and characters are displayed and the frame lamp 37 is emitted with a specific light emission pattern. It is preferable to control the operation.

Further, in another embodiment, in order to suggest that there is a small hit in the hold without using the small symbol, the number indicating the number of holds of the second special symbol is usually displayed in blue. , If there is a small hit in the hold, the above numbers may be displayed in rainbow colors.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small and medium-sized symbols indicating "V" are in the variable display or stop display of the first special symbol, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" (or "big hit"). It is a small and medium-sized symbol that is not displayed during the variable display or stop display of the second special symbol that is performed according to the situation. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the small and medium-sized symbols indicating "V" have a "small hit" (or "big hit") as the determination result of the second special symbol determination during the variable display or stop display of the first special symbol. The small and medium-sized symbol indicating "V" is used as one small symbol for notifying "loss" even during the variable display or the stop display of the second special symbol performed in response to the change. You may.

[About immediate hit production]
FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the rewinding effect performed in the first rotation of the time reduction when the number of time reductions is set to 5. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 gives a time reduction of 5 times, and then the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed first after shifting to the time saving game state is "small hit". In this case, the variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed. At that time, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the case where the variation pattern A in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long of 60 seconds is selected and the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long as 35 seconds. A short variation pattern B may be selected, and when the variation pattern B is selected, an immediate hit effect having a function as a rewind effect is performed (see FIG. 31).

In addition, since the immediate hit effect is an effect that makes it appear as if it suddenly became a small hit after the big hit game ends, it will not be performed if the right related to the second special symbol judgment is not reserved at the end of the big hit game. It is preferable to do so.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", and the hold related to the second special symbol determination is held at the end of the big hit game following the small hit game according to this "small hit". If not, even if the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 12 and the second special symbol determination of the first rotation of the time saving is executed and the determination result becomes a "small hit", the above fluctuation pattern B is performed. A configuration that does not select is adopted. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol determination is "7R time reduction 1 time jackpot" and the number of time reductions is set to 1, as described above, the right of the second special symbol determination is granted at the end of the jackpot game. Since it is not held, even if the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving becomes "small hit", the fluctuation pattern B is not selected. That is, no immediate hit effect is performed.

In the gaming machine 1, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time-saving gaming state is "small hit", the effect is performed in the following flow.
That is, at the final stage of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second special symbol determination, for example, three decorative symbols and three small symbols showing even-numbered doublets (for example, "444") are pseudo-stopped (FIG.). 31 (A)). Next, the above-mentioned symbol promotion effect (see FIG. 31 (B)) is performed, but since the type of small hit related to the second special symbol determination this time is "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", doublet. After the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols showing the even-numbered doublets are pseudo-stopped without changing the number of, these symbols are actually stopped along with the stop display of the second special symbol. (See FIG. 31 (C)).

On the other hand, when a predetermined fixed time elapses from the above-mentioned main stop, the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game using the large winning opening 13 is used. However, during the opening period of this big hit game, an opening effect is performed such as notifying the type of small hit and urging the player to hit right (see FIG. 31 (D)). Then, when a long-opening round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened for a long time is being performed, the number of rounds in the long-opening round game is notified, and the total number of prize balls refunded is displayed during the round. The production is performed (see FIG. 31 (E)). After that, when the final long open round game is completed and the ending period of the jackpot game is reached, an ending effect such as notifying the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game is performed (see FIG. 31 (F)).

When the jackpot game is completed in this way, it becomes a time-saving game state in which five time-savings are given. Here, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, the earliest second special symbol determination among the reserved ones is executed as the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time saving. .. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination becomes a "small hit" and the fluctuation pattern B of the 35-second fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is displayed as a fluctuation for 35 seconds. Along with this, a variable effect using decorative symbols, small symbols, and the like is started (see FIGS. 31 (H) and 26 (B)).

Here, since the fluctuation pattern B of the 35-second fluctuation is selected, the following effects are performed instead of the effects illustrated in FIGS. 26 (C) and later. That is, first, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving, the variable display of the three decorative symbols (scroll display of the three symbol rows) and the high-speed rotation of the three small symbols start. Will be done. Immediately after the variable display of these symbols is started, an effect display showing how noise is generated in the entire image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed, and along with this, the three decorative symbols are not displayed. It becomes a display. The decorative symbol is maintained in a hidden state until the effect of pseudo-stopping doublet (see FIG. 31 (P)), which will be described later, is started. The effect display showing how this noise is generated is performed as a rewind suggestion effect suggesting that the rewind effect is performed (see FIG. 31 (I)). Next, the characters "NEXT" are displayed, and then a clock rewinding effect is performed to show how the hour and minute hands of the clock rotate counterclockwise to rewind the time (see FIG. 31 (J)). .. Then, with this clock rewinding effect as an opportunity, an ending rewinding effect (see FIG. 31 (L)) that reversely reproduces the ending effect of FIG. 31 (F) and an effect during the round of FIG. 31 (E) are performed. A background rewinding effect during a round (see FIG. 31 (M)) that reversely reproduces the display of the background image displayed on the LCD screen 5 and an opening rewinding effect that reversely reproduces the opening effect of FIG. 31 (D). (See FIG. 31 (N)) and the symbol promotion rewind effect (see FIG. 31 (O)) in which the symbol promotion effect of FIG. 31 (B) is reproduced in reverse are performed in order. Note that the rewinding effect does not necessarily have to rewind the exact same image, and if the effect appears to be rewinding, it is like not rewinding a part of the image. You may.

Note that FIG. 31 illustrates a case where the immediate hit effect does not include the rewind effect related to the small hit game, but in other embodiments, the immediate hit effect includes the rewind effect related to the small hit game. You may try to produce.

The immediate hit effect composed of the series of rewinding effects of FIGS. 31 (L) to 31 (O) is a series of the series of FIGS. 31 (B) to (F) excluding the doublet stop of FIG. 31 (C). It is configured as a rewinding effect that reversely reproduces the effect at, for example, 8 times speed. Although not shown in the figure, this immediate hit effect is partly the one used for the effects of FIGS. 31 (B) to (F) excluding the doublet stop of FIG. 31 (C). Although the production images having the same production content are used, the display mode is different from that used for the productions in FIGS. 31 (B) to 31 (F) in that the production images are all expressed in gray. There is.

In addition, in order to make the player feel that a big hit has occurred immediately after the variable effect of FIG. 31 (B) is started, FIGS. 31 (B) to (F) excluding the doublet stop of FIG. 31 (C). ) May be played in reverse at a faster 16x speed, but if the reverse playback speed is increased too much, a pseudo-continuous production that makes the series of effects appear to be rewound will be performed. There is a possibility that the player will not be able to recognize what is being done. Therefore, it is preferable that the reverse reproduction speed for the rewinding effect is set in consideration of these points.

As described above, when the symbol promotion rewind effect that constitutes the immediate hit effect is performed, the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols that show doublet before the symbol promotion effect is performed are in a pseudo-stopped state ( See FIG. 31 (P)). When the two types of symbols are pseudo-stopped in this way, a symbol promotion effect (see FIG. 31 (Q)) is performed in the same manner as described above based on FIG. After the two small symbols are pseudo-stopped, the main stop is performed (see FIG. 31 (R)).

When the series of effects of FIGS. 31 (H) to 31 (Q) are being performed, three small symbols are variably displayed in the small symbol display area 53, and these small symbols are of the second special symbol. Since it plays an important role in notifying that the variable display is in progress, the rewinding effect for these three small symbols is not performed when the immediate hit effect is being performed.

Hereinafter, the internal configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the processing performed by the gaming machine 1 for realizing the gaming control and the effect described so far will be described.

[Configuration example of main RAM 103]
FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 32 (A), the main RAM 103 includes a determination storage area 1030, a first reserved storage area 1031, a second reserved storage area 1032, a third reserved storage area 1033, and a fourth reserved storage area 1034. , The first reserved storage area 1035, the second reserved storage area 1036, the third reserved storage area 1037, and the fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area in which various information used for the special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 is a storage area in which various information related to the first special symbol determination is stored. The first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 is a storage area in which various information related to the second special symbol determination is stored.

As illustrated in FIG. 32 (B), the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 are areas for storing jackpot random numbers acquired by the main CPU 101 in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11, respectively. , The area for storing the jackpot symbol random number, the area for storing the reach random number, the area for storing the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for storing the pre-judgment information.

This pre-determination information is information obtained by a pre-determination process (see step S218 in FIG. 35) described later based on the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number related to the first special symbol determination. .. Specifically, the pre-judgment information is information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, information indicating what kind of jackpot is, the first special. It includes information indicating a variation pattern of a symbol, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The pre-determination information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

As illustrated in FIG. 32 (C), the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038 are areas for storing jackpot random numbers acquired by the main CPU 101 in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 12, respectively. , An area for storing a big hit symbol random number, an area for storing a small hit symbol random number, an area for storing a reach random number, an area for storing a fluctuation pattern random number, and an area for storing pre-judgment information.

This pre-judgment information is based on the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number related to the second special symbol determination, and is subjected to the pre-determination process (see step S229 in FIG. 36) described later. This is the information that can be obtained. The pre-judgment information is, specifically, information indicating whether the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and if it is a big hit, what kind of big hit is it. It includes information indicating, information indicating what kind of small hit is in the case of a small hit, information indicating a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The pre-determination information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

The five pieces of information described based on FIG. 32 (B) are the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 in order from the first reserved storage area 1031 each time a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11. Stored in either. For example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where no information is stored in any of the first reserved storage areas 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, these five pieces of information are stored. It is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031. Further, for example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where five pieces of information are stored in each of the first hold storage area 1031 and the second hold storage area 1032, these five pieces of information are obtained. Is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033.

When the reserved first special symbol determination is digested, the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the first special symbol determination is executed. The information stored in the reserved storage area after the second reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031 side. For example, when the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 in a state where the information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, the second The information stored in the reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and the information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

When the reserved second special symbol determination is digested, the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the second special symbol determination is executed. To. Then, the information stored in the reserved storage area after the second reserved storage area 1036 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1035 side.

By the way, even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12) and various random numbers are acquired when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or during the jackpot game, the special symbol judgment or special It is not possible to immediately display the variation of the design.

Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired under such a situation, the main CPU 101 uses the acquired various random numbers and the like as the right to determine the first special symbol in the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 as described above. It is stored or stored in the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038 as the right to determine the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not held, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 receives various random numbers and the like acquired when the start opening prize is won. It is stored directly in the determination storage area 1030. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 11 in the determination storage area 1030 instead of the hold storage areas 1031 to 1034. Further, various random numbers acquired when the game ball wins the second starting port 12 are stored in the determination storage area 1030 instead of the hold storage areas 1035 to 1038.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when both the right of the first special symbol determination and the right of the second special symbol determination are reserved, the right of the second special symbol determination is preferentially digested. It has been adopted. Therefore, when the information related to the hold of the first special symbol determination is stored in the first hold storage area 1031 and the information related to the hold of the second special symbol determination is stored in the first hold storage area 1035. , The process of shifting the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the determination storage area 1030 has priority over the process of shifting the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the determination storage area 1030. Is executed.

[Timer interrupt processing by the game control board 100]
Next, the timer interrupt process executed on the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. Here, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 33 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. .. The processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 and 33 is performed according to the instruction issued by the main CPU 101 based on the program stored in the main ROM 102.

First, the main CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable pattern random number, and the ordinary symbol random number are added by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. A loop counter is used as the counter that performs the process of step S1, and each random number returns to "0" after reaching a preset maximum value.

Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes the switch process when the detection signal from each switch is input (step S2). This switch processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol determination, causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then shows the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the determination symbol is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 39.

Following the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing the normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4). This ordinary symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 43.

Following the process of step S4, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second starting port 12 is to be opened as a result of performing the normal symbol determination, the slide member control for operating the slide member 17 via the slide member control unit 113. The process is executed (step S5). This slide member control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44.

Following the process of step S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol process of step S3 is a small hit, the main CPU 101 performs a small win game including an open game using the small prize opening 19. The mouth opening control process is executed (step S6). The small winning opening opening control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

Following the process of step S6, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S3 that it is a big hit, or when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big winning opening control unit 116 is set. The large winning opening opening control process for controlling and opening the large winning opening 13 is executed (step S7). This large winning opening control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 47.

Following the process of step S7, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S8).

Following the process of step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary for determining various commands set (stored) in the main RAM 103 and the effect contents in the process steps prior to step S8. The process is executed (step S9). By executing the process of step S9, the game information related to the special symbol determination and the special game is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, this game information includes a hold command, a fluctuation start command, a symbol confirmation command, a jackpot opening command, a small hit opening command, a round start command, an ending command, a small winning opening opening command, and a V winning command, which will be described later. Commands etc.

[Switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. 33. Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of input of a detection signal from the first start port switch 111 as illustrated in FIG. 34, and is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. For random numbers (big hit random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers), the first start port switch process for acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input is executed (step). S21). The first start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 35.

Next, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the second start port switch 112, and various random numbers (big hit random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, etc.) that are appropriately updated by the process of step S1. For the reach random number and the fluctuation pattern random number), the second start port switch process for acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input is executed (step S22). The second start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 36.

The main CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 114, and acquires the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input for the ordinary symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. Gate switch processing is executed (step S23). This gate switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 38.

[First start port switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 35 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. 34. As illustrated in FIG. 35, in the main CPU 101, following the random number update process in step S1, the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 (specifically, the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON”. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON” based on whether or not an ON signal indicating that is input) (step S210). Here, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is "ON" (step S210: YES), the hold number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is less than Umax1 (“4” in the present embodiment) (step S211).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S211: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S212), and the first special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S213 to S216).

In this way, various acquisition information such as a jackpot random number is acquired according to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON” when the number of holds U1 is less than the maximum number of holds Umax1. When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variation display of the first special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are acquired in, these random numbers are stored in any of the first reserved storage areas 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034.

Following the process of step S216, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (time saving game state in the present embodiment) (step S217). The time saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 103. At this time, the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" when the slide member 17 is operated in an operation pattern in which the game ball cannot win a prize in the second starting port 12 when the normal symbol lottery is won. 2 This is a flag set to "ON" when the slide member 17 is operated in an operation pattern in which a game ball is easily won in the starting port 12. In step S217, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state based on whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the high base state (step S217: NO), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "OFF", the main CPU 101 executes the pre-determination process (step S218). Specifically, whether or not a jackpot is achieved based on the acquisition information acquired by the processes of steps S213 to S216 prior to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41), which will be described later. In addition to pre-determining, pre-determination is performed to pre-determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is actually selected when the first special symbol determination is executed. This pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S218, or determines that it is in a high base state (the time saving game flag is set to "ON") (step S217: YES), the first special symbol determination is performed. The hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S219). This hold command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8.
When the process proceeds to step S219 following the process of step S218, a hold command including the pre-determination information obtained in the process of step S218 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

[Second start port switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. 34. As illustrated in FIG. 36, in the main CPU 101, following the first start port switch process in step S21, the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 (specifically, the second start port switch 112 is “ON”. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 112 is turned “ON” based on whether or not an ON signal indicating that the value has been changed to “ON” has been input (step S220).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 is "ON" (step S220: YES), the hold number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of holdings of the second special symbol determination is less than Umax2 (“4” in the present embodiment) (step S221).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (step S221: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S222), and the second special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S223 to S227). ).

When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variation display of the second special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are acquired in, these random numbers are stored in any of the first reserved storage areas 1035 and the fourth reserved storage area 1038.

Following the process of step S227, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, as in the process of step S217 (step S228). Here, when it is determined that the current state is the high base state (step S228: YES), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "ON", the pre-determination process is executed (step S229). This pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S229, or determines that it is not in the high base state (the time saving game flag is set to "OFF") (step S228: NO), the second special symbol determination is performed. The hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S230). This hold command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8.
When the process proceeds to step S230 following the process of step S229, a hold command including the prior determination information obtained in the process of step S229 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

[Preliminary determination processing by the game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the pre-determination process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. Here, FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S218 and S229 of FIGS. 35 and 36.

The main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process when it is determined in the process of step S217 of FIG. 35 that it is not in the high base state, or when it is determined in the process of step S228 of FIG. 36 that it is in the high base state (step S2181). ). Specifically, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 is the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in the main ROM 102. Based on whether or not it matches (see FIG. 6 (A)), it is determined whether or not it will be determined as a big hit at the start of the fluctuation. When the right to judge the second special symbol is reserved, the big hit random number acquired when the game ball wins the second starting port 12 is stored in the main ROM 102 for the winning value for the big hit and the small hit. Based on whether or not it matches any of the winning values, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a big hit at the start of the fluctuation, or whether or not it is determined as a small hit at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result in step S2181 (step S2182). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined at the start of the fluctuation (step S2182: YES), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2183).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the fluctuation (step S2182: NO), is it determined that it is a small hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result of step S2181? Whether or not it is determined (step S2184). Here, when it is determined that a small hit is determined at the start of the fluctuation (step S2184: YES), the fluctuation pattern table for small hits is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2185).
When the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved and the acquired big hit random number matches the winning value corresponding to the small hit, the process proceeds to step S2185. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the determination result of the first special symbol determination does not become a small hit, if the first special symbol determination is suspended and it is determined as "NO" in step S2182, this step. The process proceeds to step S2186 instead of S2185.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not determined to be a small hit at the start of the fluctuation (step S2184: NO), that is, the determined result of the reserved first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) is "missing". In the case of ", it is determined whether or not the reach effect is performed during the fluctuation (step S2186). Specifically, based on whether or not the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2181 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the reach effect is performed during the fluctuation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (step S2186: YES), the main CPU 101 reads the reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S2187).

By the way, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is "missing" and the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation, particularly regarding the first special symbol determination, it is based on the number of pending special symbol determinations at the start of the fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Then, the number of pending special symbol determinations may differ between before and after the reserved special symbol determination is digested. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the special symbol determination is digested may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the special symbol determination is actually digested. That is, for the right of special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the variation, there is a possibility that an accurate variation pattern of the special symbol cannot be obtained prior to the special symbol determination.

Therefore, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S2186: NO), the process proceeds to step S2189 without performing the variation pattern random number determination process of step S2188 described later.

When the main CPU 101 sets the jackpot variation pattern table, the small hit variation pattern table, or the reach variation pattern table, the variation pattern random number determination process is executed (step S2188). Specifically, the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2181 is among the random number values defined in the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103. Based on which random number value matches, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation is specified.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2188 or determines that the reach effect is not performed (step S2186: NO), the main CPU 101 generates pre-determination information and stores it in the main RAM 103 (step S2189). The area in which the pre-determination information is stored is as described above based on FIGS. 32 (B) and 32 (C).

In this way, the main CPU 101 is based on the acquisition information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 11 (or the second start port 12), and the jackpot based on this acquisition information. Prior to the determination process and the variation pattern selection process, the pending determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) and the variation pattern of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) are performed. And get.

[Gate switch processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S24 of FIG. 34. As illustrated in FIG. 38, the main CPU 101 receives a detection signal from the gate switch 114 (an ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON”) following the second start port switch process in step S22. Is determined whether or not the gate switch 114 is "ON" based on whether or not is input (step S241).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 is "ON" (step S241: YES), the hold number T of the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum number of pending determinations Tmax (for example, “4”) (step S242).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number T is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (step S242: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number T to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S243), and is held by this process. The normal symbol random number used for the normal symbol determination is acquired and stored in the main RAM 103 (step S244).

[Special symbol processing by the game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 33.

As illustrated in FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” (step S300). This jackpot game flag is a flag stored in the main RAM 103 that indicates whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game, and is set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Set. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S300: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S300: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress based on whether or not the small hit game flag is set to "ON". (Step S301). This small hit game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the small hit game is being executed, which is stored in the main RAM 103, and is set to "ON" at the start of the small hit game and at the end of the small hit game. Set to "OFF". Here, when it is determined that the small hit game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the hold number U2 is "1" or more (step S303: YES), the hold number U2 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is not "1" or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the hold number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. (Step S305). Here, when it is determined that the hold number U1 is "1" or more (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number U1 to a value subtracted by "1" (step S306).

Following the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). Specifically, when the main CPU 101 executes the shift process following the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquired information stored in the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038 for the second special symbol determination. The storage area 1030 is shifted, and the remaining acquired information is shifted to the storage area 1030 for determination. Further, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 for the first special symbol determination is shifted to the determination storage area 1030. At the same time, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side.

Following the process in step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S309). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is a jackpot, and if it is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined. Further, regarding the second special symbol determination, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit, and when it is determined that it is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined and it is determined that it is a small hit. In some cases, the type of small hit is determined.
Then, the setting information of the special symbol indicating the result of these processes is set in the main RAM 103. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 40.

Following the process in step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol (step S310). This fluctuation pattern selection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 41.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S309 and the special symbol setting information are related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command including information indicating whether or not the above is related, information on setting the fluctuation pattern set in the process of step S310, information on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like is set in the main RAM 103 (step S311).

This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, variable display or the like using a decorative pattern or the like on the liquid crystal screen 5 is started.

Following the process of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S311 (step S312). At that time, if the processes of steps S309 to S311 are performed with the acquired information (random numbers) related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 1030, the first special symbol display 41 Start variable display of special symbols. On the other hand, when the processes of steps S309 to S311 are performed with the acquired information (random numbers) related to the second special symbol determination stored, the second special symbol display 42 starts the variable display of the special symbol. To do.

Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the fluctuation time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display in step S312 (step S313).

The main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S310 from the start of measurement of the fluctuation time in step S313 when the process of step S313 is executed or when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is in progress (step S302: YES). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. A symbol confirmation command for notifying that is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, a process of stopping the decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in a manner that indicates the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the variable display of the special symbol started in the process of step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol, or lost symbol) set in the process of step S309 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has been variable-displaying the special symbol. The stop display of this special symbol is continued until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 in a variable manner, and then displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process on the first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the fluctuation time that started measurement in the process of step S313 (step S318), and starts a big hit game when it is a big hit, or when it is a small hit. The stopped process including the process of starting the small hit game is executed (step S319). This stopped processing process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 42.

[Big hit determination process by the game control board 100]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 39. Following the shift process in step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination as illustrated in FIG. 40 (step S3071). Specifically, when the shift process for shifting the acquisition information (see FIG. 32 (B)) such as the jackpot random number related to the first special symbol determination to the determination storage area 1030 is executed, the shifted jackpot random number is generated. , It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (per type) based on whether or not it matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 6A). Here, if it matches the winning value, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it does not match the winning value, it is determined to be a loss.
On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 executes a shift process for shifting the acquisition information (see FIG. 32 (C)) such as the jackpot random number related to the second special symbol determination to the determination storage area 1030, the shifted jackpot random number is executed. Is a jackpot (per type) or a small hit (per type 2) based on whether or not it matches any of the winning values of the jackpot random numbers stored in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 6B). Judge whether or not. As illustrated in FIG. 6B, as the winning value of the jackpot random number, a winning value corresponding to the jackpot and a winning value corresponding to the small hit are prepared and match the former winning value. If it is a big hit, it is judged as a big hit, and if it matches the latter winning value, it is judged as a small hit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is a big hit (per type) based on the determination result of step S3071 (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3072: YES), the type of jackpot is determined (step S3073). Specifically, the symbol determination table illustrated in FIG. 6C is stored in the main ROM 102, and when the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is a big hit, the symbol determination table is read from the main ROM 102 and is main. Set in RAM 103. In this symbol determination table, as described above based on FIG. 6C, random values are used for each of "7R time reduction 1 time jackpot", "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", and "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot". Are associated with each other. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the jackpot symbol random number shifted to the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S3071 is a random number value corresponding to any of the above three types of jackpots. Determine the type of jackpot based on whether it matches with.

The main CPU 101 sets the jackpot symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in the process of step S3073 in the main RAM 103 as setting information (step S3074). As a result, during the process of step S317, the jackpot symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), and the jackpot is notified. Become. When the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol determination is performed in step S3071, the set jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is displayed in step S3071. When the determination is made, the set jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main CPU 101 is not a big hit (step S3072: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a small hit (per two types) based on the determination result in step S3071 (step S3076). Here, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit (step S3076: NO), a lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S3077). As a result, during the process of step S317, the lost symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), and the loss is notified. Become.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit (step S3076: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the type of small hit (step S3078). Specifically, the symbol determination table illustrated in FIG. 6D is stored in the main ROM 102, and when the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit, the symbol determination table is read from the main ROM 102. Set in the main RAM 103. In this symbol determination table, as described above based on FIG. 6 (D), for each of "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", "12R time reduction 5 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 100 times small hit". Random values are associated with each other. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the small hit symbol random number shifted to the determination storage area 1030 together with the big hit random number used in the process of step S3071 corresponds to any of the above three types of small hits. The type of small hit is determined based on whether it matches the random number value to be played.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets the small hit symbol corresponding to the type of small hit determined in the process of step S3078 in the main RAM 103 as setting information (step S3079). As a result, during the process of step S317, the small hit symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and the small hit is notified.
In this embodiment, since the small hit is not prepared for the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6A), the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Absent.

[Variation pattern selection process by the game control board 100]
FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. 39. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is "big hit" in the same manner as the process of step S3072 (step S3101). .. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3101: YES), the jackpot variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main CPU 101 is not a big hit (step S3101: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is a "small hit" as in the process of step S3076 (step S3101: NO). Step S3013). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is "small hit" (step S3013: YES), the variation pattern table for small hits is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3104). ..

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is not "small hit" (step S3013: NO), the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3071. Based on whether or not the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102, it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a big hit. (Step S3105). Here, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S3105: YES), the reach variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3106). On the contrary, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3105: NO), the loss variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3107).

Then, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern random number determination process with reference to the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S3102, the process of step S3104, the process of step S3106, or the process of step S3107 (step). S3108). Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern table, the small hit variation pattern table, or the reach variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030. The variation pattern is selected by reading the pattern from the set variation pattern table.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern table for loss is set in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol determination (or the second) is based on the number of reserved storage areas in which various information is stored immediately before the shift process in step S308 is performed. The fluctuation pattern is selected by specifying the number of holdings of the special symbol determination) and reading the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the specified number of holdings and the presence or absence of the current time reduction from the fluctuation pattern table for loss.

By selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in this way, the variation time of the special symbol is inevitably determined.

When the main CPU 101 selects a fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 101 sets the setting information of the selected fluctuation pattern in the main RAM 103 (step S3109). The fluctuation pattern setting information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the effect control board 130 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 103 by the jackpot determination process in step S309 described above.

[Processing during stop by the game control board 100]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the stopped processing in step S319 of FIG. 39. After resetting the fluctuation time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 is, as illustrated in FIG. 42, the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is a big hit (per type) as in the process of step S3072. (Step S3191). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3191: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S3192).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S3193). That is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the time-saving gaming state. Here, when it is determined that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3193: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3194). As a result, the gaming state during the jackpot game becomes the normal gaming state, and even if the player strikes right to digest the jackpot game, basically, the game ball does not win a prize at the second starting port 12. Therefore, the right to determine the second special symbol is not reserved during the jackpot game.

Then, when the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3194 or determines that the time saving game flag is not set to "ON" (step S3193: NO), the main CPU 101 sets the jackpot opening command in the main RAM 103 (step S3193: NO). Step S3195). The jackpot opening command is a command for notifying that the opening period before the opening game for opening the jackpot 13 is started according to each type, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9. Will be sent.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is not a big hit (per one type) (step S3191: NO), the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is a small hit (per two types). (Step S3197). Here, when it is determined that the hit is a small hit (step S3197: YES), the small hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S3198), and the time saving also stored in the main RAM 103 is shortened. The game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3199).

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, "small hit" can be determined only by the second special symbol determination of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination. Since the game ball does not win the second start opening 12 in the normal game state, basically, a small hit can occur only in the time-saving game state. That is, the small hit basically occurs only when the time saving game flag is set to "ON". Therefore, here, the process of setting the time saving game flag of step S3199 to "OFF" is performed without performing the same determination as in step S3193.

Following the process in step S3199, the main CPU 101 sets the small hit opening command in the main RAM 103 (step S3200). The small hit opening command is a command for notifying that the opening period (OP period in FIG. 21) before the start of the open game for opening the small winning opening 19 according to the two types is started, and is a command in step S9. It is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small hit (step S3197: NO), that is, when the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is "missing", the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is " It is determined whether or not it is set to "ON" (step S3202). That is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3202: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving game residual number J is set (step S3203). The time-saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination is executed in the time-saving game state, and in the game state setting process performed when the jackpot game ends, the execution trigger of the jackpot game. It is set to "1" times, "5" times, or "100" times depending on the type of big hit (or small hit). On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines in step S3203 whether or not the time-saving game residual number J is set based on whether or not the time-saving game residual number J is a value other than "0". ..

When the main CPU 101 determines that the time-saving game remaining number J is set (step S3203: YES), that is, when the time-saving game remaining number J is a value other than "0", this "loss" is the second. It is determined whether or not there is a loss related to the special symbol determination (step S3204). Here, when it is determined that the "loss" this time is the loss related to the second special symbol determination, the time-saving game remaining number J is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S3205). Then, it is determined whether or not the time-saving game remaining number J is "0" (step S3206), and if it is determined that the time-saving game remaining number J is "0" (step S3206: YES), the time-saving game flag Is set to "OFF" (step S3207).

By the way, the processing of steps S320 to S3207 is performed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time-saving gaming state is "missing". In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 6 and the like, the time reduction of 1, 5, or 100 times is given depending on the type of big hit or small hit, but the time reduction is once. In the case of, at the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving game residual number J is set to "1" by the process of step S7454 (see FIG. 48) described later. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time-saving game state is "missing", the variation display of the second special symbol performed in response to the second special symbol determination is displayed. At the timing of completion, the process proceeds to step S3205. As a result, the time-saving game remaining number J becomes "0", and the process proceeds to step S3207 in order to end the time-saving game state under the first end condition for one time-saving game illustrated in FIG. 20.

On the other hand, in the case of the time saving of 5 times, at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving game remaining number J is set to "5" by the process of step S7456 (see FIG. 48) described later. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time-saving game state is "missing", the variation display of the second special symbol performed in response to the second special symbol determination is displayed. At the timing of completion, the process proceeds to step S3205. Then, when this series of processes is repeated 5 times, the time-saving game residual number J becomes "0", and the time-saving game state is terminated under the first end condition for the time-saving 5 times illustrated in FIG. 20. The process proceeds to step S3207.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3207 and determines that the time-saving game residual number J is not set (step S3203: NO), it determines that the special symbol determination this time is not the second special symbol determination. In the case (step S3204: NO), or when it is determined that the time saving game remaining number J is not "0" (step S3206: NO), the time saving determination total remaining number G stored in the main RAM 102 is subtracted by "1". Update to the value (step S3208). The total remaining number G of the time reduction determination indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the time reduction game state, and in the case of one time reduction or five time reductions, " It is set to "12", and when the time is reduced to 100 times, it is set to "100" (see FIG. 48).

Following the process in step S3208, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the total remaining number of times G for the time saving determination is "0" (step S3209). Here, when it is determined that the total remaining number of times G for the time saving determination is "0" (step S3209: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" in order to end the time saving game state (step S3210).

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 42, when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, the special symbol determination is executed, and when the determination result is "missing", the special symbol determination is the second. Regardless of whether it is the special symbol determination or the first special symbol determination, the process of step S3208 is always executed. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the total residual time-saving judgment is obtained both when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "missing" and when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "missing". The number of times G is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1", and when the total remaining number of times G for the time saving determination becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S3210, and the time saving game state ends.

On the other hand, for 1 time reduction or 5 time reductions, the total remaining number G of the time reduction determination is set to "12" at the end of the jackpot, but the second special symbol determination (or the first special) in the time reduction gaming state is set. The process of step S3208 is executed every time the determination result of the symbol determination) becomes “missing”, and when the number of executions of this process reaches 12, each of the time reduction of 1 time and the time reduction of 5 times illustrated in FIG. 20 is performed. The process proceeds to step S3210 in order to end the time-saving game state under the second end condition for.

On the other hand, the same applies when the number of times of time saving is 100, and since the initial value of the total number of times of time saving determination G is "100", when the number of times of execution of the process in step S3208 reaches 100 times, FIG. The process proceeds to step S3210 in order to end the time saving game state under the ending condition for the time saving 100 times.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the normal symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. 33. As illustrated in FIG. 43, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" following the special symbol processing in step S3 (step S401). ). This auxiliary game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the slide member 17 is in the auxiliary game in which the operation of returning to the storage position is performed a predetermined number of times after maintaining the state of being arranged in the guide position for a specified time, and during the auxiliary game. Is set to "ON" and is set to "OFF" when the auxiliary game is not in progress.

If it is determined in step S401 that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S401: YES), the process proceeds to the guide member control process in step S5.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the auxiliary game flag is not set to "ON" (step S401: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 45 (step S402). ), When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number T of the normal symbol determination is "1" or more (step S403). Here, when it is determined that the hold number T is not "1" or more (step S403: NO), the process proceeds to the guide member control process in step S5.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number T is "1" or more (step S403: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number T to a value subtracted by "1" (step S404), and executes the winning random number determination process. (Step S405). Specifically, among the ordinary symbol random numbers stored in the main RAM 103 by the process in step S244 (see FIG. 38), the earliest ordinary symbol random number is won in relation to the ordinary symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. Based on whether or not it matches any of the values, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit.

Following the process of step S405, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S406) based on the determination result of the step S405, and determines that the result is a hit (step S406). Step S406: YES), the hit symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 45 is set in the main RAM 103 (step S407). On the contrary, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not a hit (step S406: NO), the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S408).

In step S407, when the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 notifies that the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S504 (see FIG. 44). The symbol is set in the main RAM 103. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the "time saving gaming state", a hit symbol for notifying that the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S505 (see FIG. 44) is set in the main RAM 103.

Therefore, even if the game state changes from the setting of these hit symbols to the end of the variable display of the normal symbols, the slide member 17 operates in an operation pattern corresponding to the set hit symbols. That is, for example, a hit symbol for notifying that the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S505 (see FIG. 44) is set during the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol. When the game state shifts to the normal game state and then the set hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S505 (see FIG. 44). become. In other words, even if the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state between the time when the winning symbol is set and the time when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, step S505 corresponding to the time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state (FIG. The slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in (44).

Following the process of step S407 or step S408, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the time-saving gaming state, based on whether or not the time-saving gaming flag is set to "ON". Is determined (step S409). Here, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state (step S409: NO), the normal symbol fluctuation time for displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 45 is set to, for example, 8 seconds (step S410). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol variation time is set to, for example, 0.5 seconds (step S411). The normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S410 or step S411 in this way is temporarily stored in the main RAM 103.

Following the process of step S410 or step S411, the main CPU 101 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 45 (step S412), and starts the measurement of the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display (step S413). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol display 45 is in the process of displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (step S402: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to end the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (step S415). Specifically, whether or not to end the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on whether or not the elapsed time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S413 reaches the normal symbol fluctuation time set in step S410 or step S411. Is determined. Here, when it is determined that the variation display of the normal symbol is not terminated (step S415: NO), the process proceeds to the guide member control process in step S5.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation display of the normal symbol is terminated (step S415: YES), the main CPU 101 terminates the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 45 and is set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S407. The hit symbol or the lost symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S408 is stopped and displayed (step S416). Then, the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in the process of step S413 is reset (step S417). Next, similarly to the process of step S406, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is correct (step S418). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S419). By setting the auxiliary game flag to "ON" in this way, the auxiliary game for moving the slide member 17 to the guide position is started.

[Slide member control process by the game control board 100]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the slide member control process in step S5 of FIG. 33. Following the normal symbol processing in step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" as illustrated in FIG. 44 (step S501). Here, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not set to "ON" (step S501: NO), the process proceeds to the small winning opening opening control process in step S6.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S501: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the slide member 17 is operating (step S502). When it is determined that the slide member 17 is not in operation (step S502: NO), the hit symbol displayed as stopped in the process of step S416 corresponds to the time-saving gaming state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second starting port 12. The slide member 17 is operated with an operation pattern corresponding to a normal game state in which the game ball is not guided to the second starting port 12 or is a time-saving hit symbol for notifying that the slide member 17 is operated with the operation pattern to be performed. It is determined whether or not the symbol is a non-time saving hit symbol for notifying that (step S503). Here, when it is determined that the stop-displayed hit symbol is not a time-saving hit symbol (step S503: NO), the slide member 17 is moved from the storage position to the guide position as an operation pattern of the slide member 17, and then 0. The operation pattern for returning to the storage position once after 036 seconds is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S504). On the contrary, when it is determined that the stop-displayed hit symbol is the time-saving hit symbol (step S503: YES), the slide member 17 is moved from the storage position to the guide position as the operation pattern of the slide member 17, and then 1 An operation pattern in which the operation of returning to the storage position after .92 seconds is performed twice with an interval of 0.5 seconds is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S505).

After setting the operation pattern in step S504 or step S505, the main CPU 101 causes the slide member control unit 113 to start the operation of the slide member 17 in the set operation pattern (step S506).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S506 or determines that the slide member 17 is in operation (step S502: YES), has the operation of the slide member 17 started in the process of step S506 completed? It is determined whether or not (step S507). Here, when it is determined that the operation of the slide member 17 is completed (step S507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to "OFF" (step S508). As a result, the auxiliary game is completed.

<About auxiliary games before and after the end of the time-saving game state>
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the number of time reductions is set to 1, one second special symbol determination and four reserved second special symbol determinations, a total of five second specials. It has a game-like property of assigning a "small hit" in any of the symbol judgments.
On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation is completed and the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, the number of pending second special symbol determinations is started. U2 becomes "3". Therefore, at this time, if the auxiliary game of the slide member 17 corresponding to the time-saving game state (the above-mentioned operation of 1.92 seconds opening × 2) is performed, the sixth right of the second special symbol determination is granted. It may occur. This also applies to the case where the time reduction of 5 times is given.

Therefore, in order to prevent the above problem from occurring, in the present embodiment, when the number of time reductions is set to 1, the gaming state is set at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation ends. A configuration is adopted in which the time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state (see FIG. 25), and the fixed time at which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed according to this fluctuation display is set to a relatively long 10 seconds. ing.

For example, if the normal symbol determination is executed immediately before the end of the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation (for example, 0.1 seconds before), the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. The symbol is set in the main RAM 103. Then, the normal symbol fluctuates for 0.5 seconds (see step S411 in FIG. 43), and as the normal symbol stops at the symbol per time reduction, the slide member 17 is placed at the guide position for 1.92 seconds and slides. The auxiliary game ends after the member 17 is placed in the storage position for 0.5 seconds and the slide member 17 is placed in the guide position again for 1.92 seconds. Therefore, the total time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the auxiliary game is 4.84 seconds (= 0.5 seconds + 1.92 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.92 seconds).

As is clear from the explanation so far, even if the normal symbol determination is performed 0.1 seconds before the end of the time saving game state and the symbol per time saving correspondence is set, the above confirmation time is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, the series of auxiliary games will be completed before the fixed time elapses. Then, until this fixed time elapses, the pending number U2 of the second special symbol determination remains "4", so even if the game ball wins the second starting port 12 according to the auxiliary game. , The sixth right of the second special symbol judgment does not occur.

In addition, since the time-saving game state is reached after the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation is completed, even if the auxiliary game is performed due to the pending digestion of the normal symbol determination, the slide member is used in one auxiliary game. Since the 17 is placed in the guide position for only 0.036 seconds, the game ball does not win the second starting port 12. That is, the sixth right of the second special symbol determination does not occur.

[Small winning opening opening / closing control process by the game control board 100]
When the result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the small hit game is executed by the small winning opening opening control process in step S6. Hereinafter, the small winning opening opening / closing control process executed on the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. Here, FIGS. 45 and 46 are detailed flowcharts of the small winning opening opening control process in step S6 of FIG. 33.

Following the guide member control process in step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit game flag is set to "ON" as illustrated in FIG. 45 (step S600). Here, when it is determined that the small hit game flag is not set to "ON" (step S600: NO), the process proceeds to the large winning opening opening control process in step S7.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game flag is set to "ON" (step S600: YES), for example, the elapsed time from setting the small hit opening command in the process of step S3200 is predetermined. Based on whether or not the set opening time has been reached, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is in the opening period (step S601). Here, when it is determined that the opening period is in progress (step S601: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S602). Here, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S602: NO), the process proceeds to the large winning opening opening control process in step S7.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S602: YES), the main CPU 101 resets the winning number X of the game ball to the small winning opening 19 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S603), and the small winning opening The control unit 118 starts the opening control of the small winning opening 19 (that is, the operation of the slide member 191 in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21)) (step S604), and sets the small winning opening opening start command in the main RAM 103. (Step S605).

This small winning opening opening start command is a command for notifying that the opening game of the small hit game described above has been started based on FIG. 21, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9. The effect control board 130 can specify the timing at which the opening game is started by receiving the small winning opening opening start command, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 even after 7 seconds have passed from this timing. If not, the above-mentioned remaining time countdown display is started based on FIG.

Returning to the description of FIG. 45, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the opening control of step S604, following the process of step S605 (step S606).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the opening period in the small hit game (step S601: NO), for example, the ending time at which the measurement is started in the process of step S621 described later ends from the start of the ending period. It is determined whether or not the ending of the small hit game is in progress based on whether or not the predetermined time has been reached (step S608). Here, when it is determined that the ending of the small hit game is not in progress (step S608: NO), the small winning opening switch 194 is turned "ON" based on the presence or absence of input of the detection signal from the small winning opening switch 194. It is determined whether or not it is (step S609). Here, when it is determined that the small winning opening switch 194 is "ON" (step S609: YES), it is determined that one game ball has won in the small winning opening 19, and the winning number X of the game balls is set. It is updated to the value added by "1" (step S610).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S610, determines that the small winning opening switch 194 is not "ON" (step S609: NO), or executes the process of step S606, the V winning opening switch 198 It is determined whether or not the V winning opening switch 198 is "ON" based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from (step S611). Here, when it is determined that the V winning opening switch 198 is "ON" (step S611: YES), the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S612). Here, the V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game of the small hit game (that is, whether or not the V winning game has been won), and the small hit game starts. Before it is set to "OFF", it is set to "ON" when the game ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 198.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets the V winning command in the main RAM 103 (step S613). This V winning command is a command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game of the small hit game, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9. Therefore, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 can specify that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening switch 198 by receiving this V winning command.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S613, or when it is determined that the V winning opening switch 198 is not "ON" (step S611: NO), the winning number X of the game ball for the small winning opening 19 is "9". It is determined whether or not it matches (step S614). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings X, which increases by "1" each time the process of step S610 is repeated, reaches "9". Here, when it is determined that the winning number X of the game ball matches "9" (step S614: YES), the losing winning opening opening control for opening the losing winning opening 197 is executed (step S615). That is, the lost winning opening 197 is opened by operating the slide member 195 via the losing winning opening opening / closing portion 119 (see FIGS. 2B and 2C).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S615, or determines that the winning number X of the game ball does not match "9" (step S614: NO), the specified opening operation of the slide member 191 (slide member 191). It is determined whether or not the operation (operation in the predetermined opening pattern) is completed (step S616). Here, when it is determined that the specified opening operation has not been completed (step S616: NO), the winning number X is the number of game balls Xmax (“10” in the present embodiment) that defines the closing timing of the small winning opening 19. It is determined whether or not they match (step S617). Here, when it is determined that the winning number X does not match the game ball number Xmax (step S617: NO), the process proceeds to the large winning opening opening control process in step S7.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number X matches the game ball number Xmax (step S617: YES) or determines that the specified opening operation is completed (step S616: YES), the process of step S604 The opening control of the started small winning opening 19 is terminated (step S618), the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in the process of step S606 is reset (step S619), and the measurement of the ending time is started (step S620).

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end of the small hit game is in progress (step S608: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed (step S622), as illustrated in FIG. 46. Specifically, the main ROM 102 stores time information indicating the length of time from the start to the end of the ending period, and the main CPU 101 starts the measurement in the process of step S621. However, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the time indicated by the above time information has been reached.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S622: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small hit game flag to "OFF" (step S623). As a result, the small hit game ends. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S624). Here, when it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S624: YES), the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S625), and the V winning flag is set to "OFF". (Step S626).

When the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game, the process of step S612 (see FIG. 45) is executed and the V winning flag is set to “ON”. Therefore, at the timing when the small hit game ends, the big hit game flag in step S625 is set to "ON", and the big hit game that digests the second and subsequent round games using the big winning opening 13 is started. Become.
On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the process of step S612 is not executed, and the small hit game is performed with the V winning flag set to "OFF". (The timing when the ending period of the small hit game ends) will be reached. Therefore, the determination process in step S624 determines "NO", and as a result, the process of setting the jackpot game flag in step S625 to "ON" is not performed. Therefore, the second and subsequent round games using the large winning opening 13 are not performed. Further, in this case, since the game state setting process of step S745 (see FIG. 47) for shifting the game state to the "time saving game state" is not performed, the game state may be shifted to the time saving game state after the small hit game is completed. Absent.

[Large winning opening opening control process by the game control board 100]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the large winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. 33. The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S720). This jackpot game flag is the process of step S3192 (see FIG. 42) executed in response to the stop display of the jackpot symbol as the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), or the V winning flag is ". It is set to "ON" by the process of step S625 (see FIG. 46) executed in response to the setting of "ON". Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S720: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S8.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S720: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in the opening period (step S721). Specifically, for example, during the opening period, the elapsed time from setting the opening command related to the jackpot game by the process of step S3195 (see FIG. 42) has reached a predetermined opening time. Determine if it exists.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening period is in progress (step S721: YES), the main CPU 101 also determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined opening time (step S721: YES). Step S722). Here, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S722: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S8.

When it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (step S722: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds Rmax of the jackpot game, the operation pattern of the jackpot control unit 116, and stores these information in the main RAM 103. (Step S723). By executing the process of step S723, various times related to the long-time game such as the interval time between the round and the next round, the ending time after the end of the final round, and the like are also set.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots (per type) are prepared: "7R time reduction 1 time jackpot", "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", and "7R time reduction 100 times jackpot" (7R time reduction 100 times jackpot). (See FIG. 6C), when these jackpots are won, the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S3192 (see FIG. 42), and the number of rounds Rmax is set to “7” in each case. Set.

On the other hand, there are three types of small hits (per 2 types): "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", "12R time reduction 5 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 100 times small hit" ( (See FIG. 6D), the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S625 (see FIG. 46). That is, the big hit game flag is set to "ON" after the open game constituting the small hit game is performed. Therefore, if you win the "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", the number of rounds Rmax is set to "3", which is one round less, and if you win the "12R time reduction 5 times small hit", the number of rounds Rmax is 1. If the number of rounds is set to "11" and the "16R time reduction 100 times small hit" is won, the number of rounds Rmax is set to "15", which is one round less.

Following the process of step S723, the main CPU 101 resets the winning number Y of the game balls to the big winning opening 13 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S724), and the big hit game also stored in the main RAM 103. The number of rounds R is updated to the value obtained by adding "1" (step S725). This number of rounds R is set to "0" before the start of the jackpot game, and "1" is added each time the process of step S725 is performed.

Following the process of step S725, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the large winning opening 13 by the large winning opening control unit 116 (step S726), and the opening time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the opening control, Measurement is started (step S727). Then, a round start command for notifying that the long open round game has started is set in the main RAM 103 (step S728).

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the opening period in the jackpot game (step S721: NO), for example, based on the information indicating which time in the jackpot game the current state stored in the main RAM 103 is. It is determined whether or not the ending period is in progress immediately after the end of the final round (step S729). Here, if it is determined that the ending period is in progress (step S729: YES), the process proceeds to step S744, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the ending period in the jackpot game (step S729: NO), for example, based on the information indicating which time in the jackpot game the current state stored in the main RAM 103 is. It is determined whether or not it is during the interval period (the period between the long open round game and the next long open round game) (step S730). Here, when it is determined that the interval period is in progress (step S730: YES), whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S723 has elapsed since the large winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Is determined (step S731). Here, when it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S731: YES), it is time to start the next round, so the process proceeds to step S724. On the contrary, when it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S731: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the interval period (step S730: NO), it determines that the round game is in progress, and based on the presence or absence of input of the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 115, the main CPU 101 is large. It is determined whether or not the winning opening switch 115 is "ON" (step S733). Here, when it is determined that the large winning opening switch 115 is "ON" (step S733: YES), the number of winnings Y of the game balls to the large winning opening 13 is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S734). ).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S728, executes the process of step S734, or determines that the large winning opening switch 115 is not "ON" (step S733: NO), the large winning opening 13 It is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed from the start of opening (step S735). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S727 has reached the specified opening time (29.5 seconds in the present embodiment) stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. ..

When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S735: NO), the winning number Y of the game balls in the current long opening round game stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the number of game balls Ymax (for example, “10”) that defines the closing timing of the large winning opening 13 (step S736). Here, when it is determined that the winning number Y does not match the game ball number Ymax (step S736: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number Y matches the game ball number Ymax (step S736: YES) or determines that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S735: YES), the large winning opening control unit At 116, the opening control of the large winning opening 13 (this long opening round game) is terminated (step S737).

Following the process of step S737, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current number of rounds R of the jackpot game stored in the main RAM 103 matches the number of rounds Rmax set by the process of step S723. (Step S738). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: NO), the elapsed time since the large winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next long open round game. The measurement of the interval time, which is the time, is started (step S739). The interval time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S739 is used for the determination process of step S731.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S740), and sets the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 103 to ". It is reset to "0" (step S741), and the ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S742). This ending command is a command for notifying that the ending period of the jackpot game is about to start, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S742 or determines that the ending period is in progress (step S729: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S744). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S740 reaches the set ending time set by the process of step S723. Here, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S744: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S8.

When it is determined that the set ending time has elapsed (step S744: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the game state of the game machine 1 after the jackpot game ends (step S745). Then, in order to end the jackpot game, the jackpot game flag is set to "OFF" (step S746).

[Game state setting process by the game control board 100]
FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the game state setting process in step S745 of FIG. 47. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, regardless of the type of winning, at least one time reduction is given after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, the main CPU 101 first sets the time-saving game flag to "ON" in order to shift the game state to the time-saving game state (step S7450).

When the time saving game flag is set to "ON", the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of time saving games to be given is one (step S7451). In the present embodiment, "7R time reduction 1 time jackpot" is prepared as a type of hit to which one time reduction is given (see FIGS. 6C and 6D). Therefore, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of time reductions to be given is one, based on whether or not the type of hit that triggered the execution of the big hit game this time is "7R time reduction 1 time big hit". To judge.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time reductions to be granted is one (step S7451: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the time reduction game residual number J to "1" (step S7452). In this way, by setting the time-saving game flag to ON and setting the time-saving game residual number J to "1", the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed, and one second special The time-saving game state continues until the symbol is determined.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to hold four second special symbol determinations during the variable display of the second special symbol performed in response to the first second special symbol determination. However, when the number of time reductions is one, the game state shifts from the time reduction game state to the normal game state at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol ends, so that the four second special symbols are reserved. The determination is executed after the transition to the normal gaming state.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time reductions to be given is not one (step S7451: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of time reductions to be given is five (step S7453). In this embodiment, "7R time reduction 5 times big hit", "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", and "12R time reduction 5 times small hit" are prepared as the types of hits to which 5 times reduction is given (12R time reduction 5 times small hit). 6 (C) and 6 (D)). Therefore, the main CPU 101 should be given 5 times of time reduction based on whether or not the type of hit that triggered the execution of the big hit game is one of the above three types of big hits or small hits. Determine if it exists.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time reductions to be granted is 5 (step S7453: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the time reduction game residual number J to "5" (step S7454). In this way, by setting the time-saving game flag to ON and setting the time-saving game residual number J to "5", the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed, and the second special of 5 times. The time-saving game state continues until the symbol is determined.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the time reduction of 5 times is given, the 4 second specials are displayed during the variation display of the 2nd special symbol performed in response to the 5th second special symbol determination. It is possible to store the hold of the symbol judgment, but when the number of time reductions is 5, the gaming state shifts from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state at the timing when the fifth variation display of the second special symbol ends. Therefore, all of the four reserved second special symbol determinations are executed after shifting to the normal gaming state.

When the time-saving game remaining number J is set to "1" in the process of step S7452, or when the time-saving game remaining number J is set to "5" in the process of step S7454, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving determination total remaining number G. Set to "12" (step S7455). As a result, when the total remaining number G of the time reduction determination becomes "0", the common end condition (see FIG. 20) for the case of one time reduction and the case of two time reductions is satisfied, and the above step S3210 is satisfied. By the process of (see FIG. 42), the gaming state is changed from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time reductions to be given is not 5 (step S7453: NO), that is, when the number of time reductions to be given is 100, the total residual number G of the time reduction determination is set to "100". (Step S7456). As a result, when the total remaining number G of the time reduction determination becomes "0", the end condition (see FIG. 20) peculiar to the case of 100 times of time reduction is satisfied, and the above step S3210 (see FIG. 42). By the processing, the gaming state is changed from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

By the way, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game of the small hit game, it is determined as "NO" in the process of step S624 (see FIG. 46), and the big hit flag of step S625 is set. The process set to "ON" is not executed. Therefore, in step S720 (see FIG. 47) of FIG. 47, it is determined as “NO”, and as a result, the game state setting process (see FIG. 48) of step S745 is not executed.

As is clear from this explanation, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198, the gaming state setting process that should normally be performed at the end of the jackpot game is performed. By not executing, the control that does not shift the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state is realized.

[Timer interrupt processing by the effect control board 130]
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing described later. Then, the sub CPU 131 repeats the random number update process for updating the effect random number or the like used for determining the effect content in a predetermined cycle shorter than the CTC cycle. That is, the sub CPU 131 repeats the timer interrupt process in the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update process in the predetermined cycle while the gaming machine 1 is running.

Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process executed on the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. Here, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the effect control board 130. The sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 49 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds), similarly to the timer interrupt process performed on the game control board 100. The processing performed by the effect control board 130 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 49 and 49 is performed according to the instruction issued by the sub CPU 131 based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132.

First, when the sub CPU 131 receives a command as game information from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 executes a command reception process that performs processing based on the received command (step S10). This command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 50.

Following the process of step S10, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the small winning opening 19 is being opened (step S33). In other words, it is determined whether or not an open game for opening the small winning opening 19 is being executed. Specifically, the sub CPU 131 has a predetermined opening time (this opening time) after receiving the small winning opening opening start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the process of step S605 (see FIG. 45). In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the small winning opening 19 is being opened based on whether or not 15 seconds: see FIG. 21) has been reached.

Then, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the small winning opening 19 is being opened (step S32: YES), the small winning opening for performing the above-mentioned remaining time countdown display during the opening game in which the small winning opening 19 is opened. The opening process is executed (step S33). The processing during the opening of the small winning opening will be described in detail later based on FIG. 53.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S33, or determines that the small winning opening 19 is not open (step S32: NO), the sub CPU 131 produces a result of the challenge battle effect (winning effect or defeat) shown in FIG. 24. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the production) (step S42).

The sub CPU 131 realizes a series of RUSH challenge battles (see FIG. 24) at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol corresponding to the first rotation when the number of time reductions after the jackpot game is set to one. The variation effect pattern setting process of step S1062 (see FIG. 52) for setting the variation effect pattern for the purpose is executed. Then, a variation effect start command instructing the execution of the effect in the variation effect pattern is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140. This series of processing is also performed at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol corresponding to the fifth rotation when the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot game is set to five.
On the other hand, the control CPU 141 of the image / sound control board 140 transmits the data related to the image / sound control to the effect control board 130 while executing the image / sound control for realizing the effect in the variation effect pattern.

Therefore, in step S42, the sub CPU 131 identifies the progress of the RUSH challenge battle based on the data related to the image / sound control transmitted from the image / sound control board 140, and based on the specific result, the winning effect or the winning effect or As a result of starting the defeat production, it is determined whether or not it is the production start timing.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that it is the start timing of the result effect (win effect or defeat effect) (step S42: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the result effect control process for controlling the execution of the result effect (step S43). The result effect control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 54.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S43 or determines that it is not the start timing of the result effect (step S42: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes the command transmission process (step S50). Specifically, the command set in the sub RAM 133 by the command reception process in step S10, the small winning opening opening process in step S33, and the result effect control process in step S43 is transmitted to the image / acoustic control board 140 (and the lamp control board 150). Send to.
By performing this command transmission process, the image / sound control board 140 is instructed to execute the effect by displaying the image, outputting the effect sound, and the like, and the lamps are turned on and the effect is executed by the operation of the accessory. Instructed to control board 150.

Then, the sub CPU 131 executes the data transfer process (step S60). Specifically, since the data related to the image / sound control is transmitted from the image / sound control unit 140, the data is transferred to the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the lamp control unit 150 controls the effect by the effect medium such as the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the effect accessory 7 so as to synchronize with the effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24.

[Command reception processing by the effect control unit 130]
FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 49. As illustrated in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S101). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S101: NO), the process proceeds to step S32.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command from the game control board 100 has been received (step S101: YES), the sub CPU 131 controls the game according to the processing of step S219 (see FIG. 35) or step S230 (see FIG. 36). It is determined whether or not the command is a hold command transmitted from the board 100 (step S102).

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S102: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the hold command reception process (step S103). This hold command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 51.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a hold command (step S102: NO), the received command varies from the game control board 100 according to the process of step S311 (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether or not it is a start command (step S105). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the variation start command (step S105: YES), the variation start command reception process is executed (step S106). The variable start command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 52.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S105: NO), the symbol confirmation transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the processing of step S316 (see FIG. 39) for the received command. It is determined whether or not it is a command (step S108). When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is a symbol determination command (step S108: YES), the sub CPU 131 outputs a decorative symbol and a small symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation after ending the variation display of the decorative symbol. A variable effect end command instructing the execution of the process to be stopped is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S109).

By transmitting this variation effect end command to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the process of step S50, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is shown. (Or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), and the judgment result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) The decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the above will be stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a symbol determination command (step S108: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received command is an operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S110). .. This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, and is operated. It includes information indicating whether the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, and when the effect key 27 is operated, information indicating which key is operated.
When the sub CPU 131 determines that the operation command has been received (step S110: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets the operation notification command in the sub RAM 133 to notify that the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated (step S111).

When this operation notification command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the process of step S50, it is notified that the operation has been performed, and this notification is an operation promotion effect (for example, FIG. 28A). If it is in (see, for example), a victory effect (see, for example, FIG. 28 (B)) or a defeat effect (see, for example, FIG. 28 (E)) will be performed.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not an operation command (step S110: NO), the sub CPU 131 is a jackpot opening command transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the processing of step S3195 (see FIG. 42). (Step S112). Here, when it is determined that the received command is a jackpot opening command (step S112: YES), setting information for starting a jackpot opening effect such as notifying the type of jackpot or urging the player to hit right. The jackpot opening effect start command including the above is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S113).

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the jackpot opening command (step S112: NO), the sub CPU 131 is a small hit transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the processing of step S3200 (see FIG. 42). It is determined whether or not the command is an opening command (step S114). Here, when it is determined that the received command is a small hit opening command (step S114: YES), the above-mentioned big hit type display, right-handed suggestion display, V area instruction display, and their display are displayed based on FIG. A small hit opening effect start command including setting information for executing the output of the effect sound accompanying the above is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S115).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the small hit opening command (step S114: NO), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the process of step S728 (see FIG. 47). It is determined whether or not it is a round start command (step S117). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the round start command (step S117: YES), the setting information for notifying the number of rounds or starting the production during the round during the long open round game of the jackpot game. A round effect start command including the above is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S118).

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the round start command (step S117: NO), the sub CPU 131 is an ending command transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the process of step S742 (see FIG. 47). It is determined whether or not there is (step S119). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the ending command (step S119: YES), the ending effect start command including the setting information related to the ending effect is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S120).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the ending command (step S119: NO), the sub CPU 131 receives a small prize transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the process of step S605 (see FIG. 45). It is determined whether or not it is a mouth opening start command (step S121). Here, when it is determined that the command is to start opening the small winning opening (step S121: YES), the elapsed time from the start of opening the small winning opening 19 (that is, the elapsed time from the start of the open game) is measured. Is started (step S122).
Based on this elapsed time, the sub CPU 131 controls the above-mentioned remaining time countdown display (see FIG. 21) and the output of the effect sound accompanying the display.

Next, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the small winning opening opening start command (step S121: NO), the sub CPU 131 is sent from the game control board 100 according to the process of step S613 (see FIG. 45). It is determined whether or not it is the transmitted V winning command (step S123). Here, when it is determined that the V winning command is used (step S123: YES), the V winning notification effect start command for instructing the start of the V winning notification effect for notifying the V winning of the game ball is set in the sub RAM 133 (step). S124).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is not a V winning command (step S123: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes another process according to the other command (step S125).

[Holding command reception processing by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step 103 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S102: YES), the sub CPU 131 adds "1" to the number of holds for special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133, as illustrated in FIG. 51. It is updated to the value (step S1030). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to the value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. If this is the case, the number of pending second special symbol determinations is updated to the value obtained by adding "1".

Next, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received hold command includes the pre-determination information (step S1031), and if it determines that the pre-determination information is not included (step S1031: NO). , The icon display command is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1037).

This icon display command is a command for instructing the display of the hold icon indicating that the special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process in step S50.

This icon display command includes the winning start port information, and the general CPU 141 of the image / acoustic control board 140 determines, for example, which special symbol determination of the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination is suspended. Identify based on the winning start information. Here, when it is specified that the first special symbol determination is held, an icon display command instructing execution of the process of displaying the hold icon in the hold icon display area 51 is set in the sub RAM 133.
On the other hand, when it is specified that the second special symbol determination has been suspended and the moving bar 55 is being displayed, for example, an icon display command instructing execution of a process of displaying a hold suggestion icon in the right area of the moving bar 55. Is set in the sub RAM 133.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received hold command includes the pre-determination information (step S1031: YES), the sub CPU 131 stores the pre-determination information in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 133 (step S1032).

This pre-judgment information may be pre-judgment information regarding the hold of the first special symbol determination or pre-judgment information regarding the hold of the second special symbol determination, and the pre-judgment regarding the hold of the first special symbol determination. The information determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect targeting the hold icon, and when executing this icon change effect, determines what kind of effect pattern the icon change effect is to be executed. Used for processing.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (see FIG. 13) for the icon is performed, and when the icon change effect is executed, it is determined what kind of effect pattern is to be executed. Also, the prior determination information regarding the suspension of the first special symbol determination is used.

On the other hand, in the case of the preliminary determination information regarding the hold of the second special symbol determination, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold suggestion icon displayed on the movement bar 55 is not performed, so that the preliminary determination is performed. The information is not used in the processing related to the icon change effect targeting the hold suggestion icon.
In this embodiment, in order to realize the RUSH challenge battle (see FIG. 24), it is determined which result effect is to be executed before the victory effect or the defeat effect, which is the result effect of the challenge battle, is started. It is necessary, and the pre-judgment information regarding the hold of the second special symbol determination is used in the process of determining whether to perform the result effect of the victory effect or the defeat effect.

Returning to the description of FIG. 51, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the pre-determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 is the pre-determination information regarding the hold of the first special symbol determination (step S1033), following the process of step S1032. ). Here, when it is determined that the information is not the prior determination information regarding the hold of the first special symbol determination (step S1033: NO), it is not necessary to make the setting related to the icon change effect for the hold suggestion icon, so that step S1037 is described above. Processing proceeds to.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the pre-determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 is the pre-determination information regarding the hold of the first special symbol determination (step S1033: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the icon change effect lottery (step S1034). .. Specifically, first, the icon change effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133. This icon change effect random number is added by "1" each time the above-mentioned random number update process is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the icon change effect random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on whether or not the change effect random number matches any of the random numbers defined in the icon change effect table stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance. To do.

Although not shown in the figure, the random number values defined in the icon change effect table have the following characteristics.
That is, in the icon change effect table, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random number value are associated with each other.
Then, a larger number of random numbers are associated with the "big hit" related to the first special symbol determination than with the "loss" related to the first special symbol determination.
Further, the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time of the first special symbol is associated with a larger number of random values than the fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

Therefore, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the icon change effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the icon change effect.

The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the lottery result in step S1034 is the lottery result of executing the icon change effect (step S1035). Here, if it is determined that the result is not the lottery result of executing the icon change effect (step S1035: NO), the process proceeds to step S1037 described above. In this case, since the setting related to the icon change effect is not performed, the icon change effect targeting the hold icon is not performed, and the icon change effect targeting the icon (icon change success effect or icon change) is not performed. (Including failure production etc.) will not be performed.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the result is a lottery to execute the icon change effect (step S1035: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets the setting information of the icon change effect in the sub RAM 133 (step S1036). Specifically, the following processing is executed. For example, whether or not to perform an effect lottery using random numbers to execute an icon change effect targeting the hold icon and whether or not to execute an icon change effect targeting the icon corresponding to the hold icon. decide. Then, when it is decided to execute the icon change effect for the hold icon, one of the plurality of icon change effect effect patterns is selected, and the selected icon change effect pattern is set as the hold icon. Is set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the icon change effect for the target.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the icon change effect targeting the icon, the sub CPU 131 determines the initial display color of the icon and the final display color of the icon, and these display colors. Is set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the icon change effect for the icon.

Then, when the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1036 and sets the setting information of the icon change effect targeting the hold icon in the sub RAM 133, the sub CPU 131 subsubscribes the icon display command including this setting information in step S1037. Set in RAM 133.

When the sub CPU 131 receives the change start command related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon when the setting information of the icon change effect for the icon is stored in the sub RAM 133, the sub CPU 131 receives the change start command corresponding to the icon. In addition, the following processing is performed.

For example, when the setting information indicating that the initial display color of the icon is white and the final display color of the icon is also white is stored, the sub CPU 131 may perform step S1063 (FIG. 52). In the notice effect pattern setting process of (see)), a notice effect pattern for performing only the icon change failure effect of FIG. 13 (B) is set. That is, a notice effect pattern is set in which only the icon change failure effect as a so-called ghost effect is performed.

Further, for example, when the setting information indicating that the initial display color of the icon is white and the final display color of the icon is red is stored, the following effect pattern is used. It can be set.
For example, as the first notice effect pattern, it is possible to set a notice effect pattern in which only the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) that changes the display color of the icon from white to red is performed.
Further, as the second notice effect pattern, an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) that fails to change the display color of the icon from white to red and a rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13 (C)). (See), a failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)), and an icon change success effect (see FIG. 13 (E)) that succeeds in changing the display color of the icon from white to red. The production pattern can be set.
Further, as the third notice effect pattern, an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13 (B)) that fails to change the display color of the icon from white to green and a rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13 (C)). (See), a failed rewind effect (see FIG. 13 (D)), and a successful high-level icon change effect that succeeds in changing the display color of the icon from white to red (higher than the green color before rewinding) (see). It is possible to set a notice effect pattern that performs (see FIG. 13 (F)).

When the sub CPU 131 can execute a plurality of advance notice effect patterns in this way, for example, it executes a lottery using random numbers, selects any one of the advance notice effect patterns, and gives an advance notice regarding the icon change effect. Set the production pattern.

[Variation start command reception processing by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S106 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is the fluctuation start command (step S105: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a series of processes exemplified in FIG. 52.

That is, the sub CPU 131 acquires the value at the time when the variation start command is received from the game control board 100 with respect to the effect random number appropriately updated by the above-mentioned random number update process, stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1060), and receives it. The fluctuation start command is analyzed (step S1061).

As described above, the fluctuation start command includes the setting information of the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the setting information of this symbol is related to the first special symbol determination, or is related to the second special symbol determination. It includes information on a winning start port indicating whether or not the game is a game, information on setting a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified. That is, to specify whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, what kind of big hit it is if it is a big hit, and what kind of small hit it is if it is a small hit. Can be done. Further, by specifying whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for loss based on the fluctuation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. .. In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

When the variation start command is analyzed, the sub CPU 131 executes the variation effect pattern setting process for setting the variation effect pattern of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S1062). By executing this variation effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the decorative symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo continuous effect (reach rewind effect in this embodiment), the type of the decorative symbol constituting the reach pattern, Types and contents of reach production, contents of pseudo-continuous production, numbers indicated by left and right small symbols in reach mode when executing SPSP reach and story reach, presence or absence of RUSH challenge battle, decorative symbols and small to stop The type of symbol is determined. When the pre-judgment information related to the second special symbol determination indicating the small hit is stored in the sub RAM 133, the three small symbols including the small and medium-sized symbols indicating "V" are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped. A variable effect pattern for this is set. In this case, the three small symbols rotating at high speed are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a reach loss including the small and medium-sized symbols indicating "V", and the symbol confirmation command is transmitted from the game control board 100. These three small symbols will stop.

For example, when a fluctuation pattern having an extremely short fluctuation time of 1 second is set for the second special symbol, the sub CPU 131 sets a fluctuation effect pattern that performs only high-speed rotation of the three small symbols. 2 When the pre-judgment information indicating "small hit" regarding the remaining hold related to the special symbol determination is stored in the sub RAM 133, "V" is sent in response to the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the game control board 100. A variation effect end command for finally stopping the three small symbols indicating the disparity including the small and medium-sized symbols indicating "" is set and transmitted to the image / sound control board 140.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 executes a notice effect pattern of various notice effects mainly suggesting the jackpot reliability, which is executed when the decorative symbol and the small symbol are variablely displayed in the change effect pattern selected in the process of step S162. The advance notice effect pattern setting process to be set is executed (step S1063). By executing the process of step S1063, as described above, the advance notice effect pattern of the icon change effect for the icon may be set.

Although detailed description is omitted, in step S1063, for example, a step-up effect that can be gradually developed to any step equal to or less than the predetermined number of steps is executed with the preset number of steps as the upper limit. When it is decided whether or not to execute the step-up effect, a process of determining what kind of effect pattern to execute the step-up effect is performed. In addition, it is determined whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect that displays the conversation window showing how the predetermined character emits the dialogue, and if it is decided to execute, what kind of effect pattern is used to execute the conversation notice effect. Is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 131 subordinates the variation effect start command instructing the start of the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S1062 and the execution of the advance notice effect in the advance notice effect pattern set in the process of step S1063. It is set in the RAM 133 (step S1064).

This variation effect start command includes information indicating the variation effect pattern set by the process of step S1062 and information indicating the notice effect pattern set by the process of step S1063, and includes the command transmission process of step S50. Is transmitted to the audiovisual control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. As a result, the variation effect and the advance notice effect in which the effect pattern is set on the effect control board 130 are realized by the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

Following the process of step S1064, the sub CPU 131 subtracts "1" from the number of holds stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1065). Specifically, when the variation start command received from the game control board 100 notifies the start of the symbol variation related to the first special symbol determination, the number of pending first special symbol determinations is subtracted by "1". Update to the value you set. On the other hand, when the received variation start command notifies the start of the symbol variation related to the second special symbol determination, the pending number of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value subtracted by "1".

[Processing while the small winning opening is open by the production control board 130]
FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart of the process during opening of the small winning opening in step S33 of FIG. 49. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the small winning opening 19 is being opened (step S32: YES), first, the elapsed time (after the opening game is started) when the measurement is started in the process of step S122 (see FIG. 50). It is determined whether or not the elapsed time of (step S331) has reached 7 seconds (step S331). Here, if it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached 7 seconds (step S331: NO), the process proceeds to step S334 described later.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the elapsed time has reached 7 seconds (step S331: YES), the game ball moves to the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game based on whether or not the V winning command has already been received. Is determined (step S332). Here, if it is determined that the game ball has already passed through the V winning opening switch 198 (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S334.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 (step S332: NO), the remaining time countdown display (see FIGS. 21, 22 (D) and (E)) is displayed. Execute (step S333). Specifically, a command instructing the image / sound control board 140 to execute the remaining time countdown display is set in the sub RAM 133.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S333 and determines that the elapsed time has not reached 7 seconds (step S331: NO), it determines that the game ball has already passed the V winning opening switch 198. If this is the case (step S332: YES), it is determined whether or not a V winning command has been received from the game control board 100 (step S334).

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the V winning command has been received (step S334: YES), the sub CPU 131 terminates the V area instruction display (see FIGS. 21 and 22 (C)) that has been performed before the start of the open game. Instruct the control board 140 (step S335). Specifically, for example, an end command for instructing the end of the V area instruction display is set in the sub RAM 133. Then, for example, the remaining time is based on whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the remaining time countdown display in the process of step S333 reaches the time required for the remaining time countdown display (5 seconds in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not the countdown display is being executed (step S336). Here, when it is determined that the remaining time countdown display is being executed (step S336: YES), the image / acoustic control board 140 is instructed to end the remaining time countdown display (step S337). Specifically, for example, an end command for instructing the end of the remaining time countdown display is set in the sub RAM 133.

[Result production control processing by the production control board 130]
FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the result effect control process in step S43 of FIG. 49. When the sub CPU 131 determines that it is the result effect start timing (step S42: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the victory effect pattern has been set (step S431).

The sub CPU 131 indicates, for example, that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" when the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving for producing the RUSH challenge battle is started. When a variation start command including information is received, in the variation effect pattern setting process of step S1062 (see FIG. 52), a variation effect pattern in which a challenge battle is performed after the reach is established and then a victory effect is performed is set. In this case, the "small hit" is notified in the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation, and the small hit game is started according to the "small hit". On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time saving is started, if a variation start command including information indicating that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "missing" is received. , In the variation effect pattern setting process of step S1062 (see FIG. 52), the variation effect pattern in which the defeat effect is performed after the challenge battle is performed after the reach is established is set.

By the way, when the judgment result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first rotation is "missing", the variable effect pattern for performing the defeat effect is set as described above, but it is temporarily suspended. If any of the four second special symbol determinations that are determined to be "small hits" is included, as described above based on FIGS. 25 (B), 30 and the like, 1 It is necessary to start the victory effect instead of the defeat effect from the variable display of the second special symbol of the rotation.
Therefore, when it is determined that the victory effect pattern has not been set (step S431: NO), the following processing is performed.

That is, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the victory effect pattern has not been set (step S431: NO), that is, when the defeat effect pattern is set because the first rotation of the time saving is lost, the sub CPU 131 is in hold. It is determined whether or not there is a "small hit" (step S432). Specifically, in the time-saving game state, each time a hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received from the game control board 100, the advance determination information included in the hold command is in step S1032 (see FIG. 51). Since it is stored in the sub RAM 133 by the process, the sub CPU 131 is set to "small" in the hold based on whether or not the pre-determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 includes a "small hit". Determine if there is a "hit".

When the sub CPU 131 determines that there is a "small hit" in the hold (step S432: YES), even if the first rotation of the time reduction is "missing", the sub CPU 131 is displaying the fluctuation of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction. Since it is necessary to start the winning effect from, for example, the setting information of the variable effect pattern indicating that the defeat effect is performed, which is stored in the sub RAM 133, is rewritten to the variable effect pattern indicating that the winning effect is performed. As a result, the defeat effect pattern is updated to the victory effect pattern (step S433).

Then, the sub CPU 131 sets the winning effect command including the setting information of the variable effect pattern indicating the updated winning effect pattern in the sub RAM 133 in order to start the winning effect on the image / sound control board 140 (step S434). This victory effect command is transmitted to the image / sound control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S50, whereby the victory effect (see FIG. 24 (K)) is performed following the challenge battle (see FIG. 24 (H)). It is said.

On the other hand, when the first rotation of the time reduction is a "small hit", when the variation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction is started in order to notify the "small hit" of the first rotation of the time reduction. , Since the execution of the variable effect in the variable effect pattern indicating the winning effect pattern has already been instructed, it is not necessary to instruct the start of the winning effect again. Therefore, when it is determined that the winning effect pattern has been set. (Step S431: YES) proceeds to the command transmission process of step S50.

In addition, if the first rotation of the time reduction is "missing", the player is defeated when the variation display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving is started in order to notify the "loss" of the first rotation of the time reduction. The execution of the variation effect in the variation effect pattern indicating the effect pattern has already been instructed. Therefore, if there is no "small hit" in Hold 1 to Hold 4 (if all are "missing"), it is not necessary to instruct the start of the defeat effect again. Therefore, when it is determined that there is no "small hit" in the hold (step S432: NO), a series of result effect control processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the command transmission process in step S50.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image / sound control board 140]
Next, the timer interrupt process executed on the image / sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the image / sound control board 140. The image / sound control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 55 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. To do.

First, the control CPU 141 executes an image output control process that controls the image display on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the command received from the effect control board 130 (step S71). This image output control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 56.

Following the process of step S71, the general CPU 141 executes an effect sound output control process for outputting various effect sounds from the speaker 24 so as to synchronize with the effect display performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or asynchronously (). Step S72).

Following the process in step S72, the centralized CPU 141 executes the data transmission control process (step S73). Specifically, data relating to the image / sound control performed on the image / sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image / sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. As a result, the frame lamp 25, the board lamp 37, the effect accessory 7, and the like are controlled so as to be synchronized with the effect performed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24.

[Image output control processing by the image / sound control board 140]
FIG. 56 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step 71 of FIG. 55. First, the control CPU 141 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S711). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S7111: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, when the control CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S711: YES), the control CPU 141 sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 143 (step S712). Next, the general CPU 141 determines how to display various effect images on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the set setting information, creates a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 144, and controls the display list. It is stored in the RAM 143 (step S713), and the display list is set in the display list storage area of the VDP 144 (step S714). The display list consists of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, the display priority, the display magnification, the angle of rotation, and the transparency. It includes various parameters such as rate.

[Action and effect of this embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, both the failed rewinding effect and the reach rewinding effect can be executed, so that a high effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of these two types of rewinding effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is "missing", the effect performed during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation of the time reduction (winning effect: FIG. 30 (A) shows the effect performed during the variation display of the second special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction when the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation of the time reduction is "small hit" (see FIG. 30 (A)). Victory effect: See Fig. 28 (B)). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, if the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 even after 7 seconds have passed since the open game (first round game) was started, the remaining time countdown is performed. The display is done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a state in which the open game ends without the game ball passing through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game.

[Other variants]
It goes without saying that the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for the determination, etc. in the above-mentioned flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even if the order or value is other than the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screen view and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are also merely examples, and may be in other embodiments.

Further, as another embodiment, a part of the processing executed on the image / sound control board 140 is executed by the effect control board 130, or a part of the process executed on the effect control board 130 is performed on the image / sound control board. It may be executed by 140. Further, the effect control board 130 and the image / sound control board 140 are integrally configured so that the process executed by the effect control board 130 and the process executed by the image / sound control board 150 are executed by one control board. You may.

1 Gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine)
5 Liquid crystal screen (main liquid crystal display device)
11 1st start port 12 2nd start port 13 Large prize opening 16 Gate 17 Slide member 19 Small prize opening 24 Speaker 26 Direction button 38 Slide member 41 1st special symbol display 42 2nd special symbol display 43 1st special symbol Hold indicator 44 2nd special symbol hold indicator 45 Normal symbol indicator 46 Normal symbol hold indicator 47 Game status indicator 50 Decorative symbol display area 51 Hold icon display area 52 The area 53 Small symbol display area 54 Right-handed suggestion image 55 Move bar 56 Move icon 57 Pseudo-variation count suggestion image 100 Game control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 sub ROM
133 sub RAM
140 Image acoustic control board 141 General CPU
142 Control ROM
143 Control RAM
144 VDP
145 Acoustic DSP
150 Lamp control board 151 Lamp CPU
152 lamp ROM
153 lamp RAM
191 Slide member 192 Restricted piece 194 Small winning opening switch 195 Slide member 197 Lost winning opening switch 198 V Winning opening switch

Claims (1)

A variable winning means that is provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and can be changed into a non-passing state in which the game ball does not pass and a passable state in which the game ball easily passes.
A special winning area provided in the variable winning means and capable of winning a game ball,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game for controlling the variable winning means in the easy-to-pass state, and
Wherein when the determination unit Ru is determined to execute the special game, game ball running first special game can be finished in the special winning regions, the said special pay region game ball during execution of the first special game A special game execution means for executing a second special game in which the player is more advantageous than the first special game after the first special game is completed.
A game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
It includes a presentation control means for controlling the effect, and
The special game execution means is
If the game ball does not win the special winning area during the execution of the first special game, the second special game is not executed after the first special game is completed.
The game state control means
Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning area during the execution of the first special game, the game state after the end of the second special game, which is executed after the end of the first special game, is the first. It can be controlled to 2 game states,
The effect control means
During the execution of the first special game, it is possible to execute and control an instruction effect for displaying an instruction image instructing the launch of the game ball into the special winning area.
Based on the remaining time of said variable winning means from said passage easily state at the first special game until changes the to non-passage state, the time effect corresponding to the remaining time during execution of the first special game Execution control is possible,
When the game ball has passed through the special winning area, the display of the instruction image is finished, and the display of the instruction image is finished.
If the gaming ball has not won the special winning area at the end of the time production, the gaming machine that finishes the time production and then ends the instruction effect.

Images